TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
...............................79
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
................................... 191
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................. 271
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
...............................................385
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
............................................... 405
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
..................................................493
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
..........................................523
10
INDEX
....................................................................533
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction ........................... 4
䡵 A Message From DaimlerChrysler Corporation . . . 4
䡵 How To Use This Manual ..................5
䡵 Warnings And Cautions ................... 7
䡵 Van Conversions/Campers ................. 7
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number ............... 8
䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............ 8
1
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
A MESSAGE FROM DAIMLERCHRYSLER
CORPORATION
DaimlerChrysler Corporation and Cummins welcome
you as a new Dodge Ram Cummins Turbo Diesel-
powered truck owner.
Almost 100% of the heavy duty trucks in the United
States are diesel powered because of the fuel economy,
rugged durability, and high torque which permits pulling
heavy loads. Cummins engines power well over half of
these trucks. Now this same technology and proven
performance is yours in your new Dodge Ram truck
equipped with the Cummins, Turbocharged, Charge Air
Cooled, Diesel engine.
4 INTRODUCTION
Your diesel truck will sound, feel, drive, and operate
differently from a gasoline-powered truck. It is important
that you read and understand this manual. You may find
that some of the starting, operating, and maintenance
procedures are different. However, they are simple to
follow and careful adherence to them will ensure that
you take full advantage of the features of this engine.
Thank you for choosing the Dodge Ram truck with
Cummins Turbo Diesel power.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/ body builders. See
the Warranty information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-
turer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment in-
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your selling dealer for assis-
tance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Vehicle Identification Number
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ..................12
▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................12
▫ Locking Doors With The Key ..............14
䡵 Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped ..........15
▫ If You Wish To Manually Lock The
Steering Wheel ........................15
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock .........15
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System ..............................15
䡵 Sentry Key — If Equipped .................15
▫ Replacement Keys ......................16
▫ Customer Key Programming ..............17
▫ General Information ....................18
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped .........18
▫ Rearming Of The System .................18
▫ ToSetTheAlarm ......................18
▫ To Disarm The System ...................19
䡵 Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped .......19
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped .........20
2
▫ To Unlock The Doors ...................20
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................21
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................23
▫ General Information ....................23
▫ Transmitter Battery Service ...............24
䡵 Door Locks ............................25
▫ Manual Door Locks — If Equipped .........25
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ..........26
▫ Child Protection Door Lock ...............29
䡵 Windows .............................30
▫ Power Windows – If Equipped .............30
▫ Power Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped ....32
▫ Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped .........32
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................32
䡵 Occupant Restraints
(2500/3500/Mega Cab Only) ................33
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................34
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ....42
▫ Automatic Locking Restraint (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped ..........................42
▫ Center Lap Belts .......................43
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................44
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) ...........................44
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............45
▫ Seat Belt Extender ......................46
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbag ............46
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............58
▫ Child Restraint ........................60
䡵 New Engine Break-In .....................74
䡵 Safety Tips ............................75
▫ Transporting Passengers .................75
▫ Lock Your Vehicle ......................76
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................76
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
TheVehicle ..........................77
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
TheVehicle ..........................77
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, and remove the key.
Ignition Key
Ignition Switch Positions
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC), the power window switches,
radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power out-
lets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. For details, refer to “KEY OFF POWER
DELAY > OFF” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position, the
steering and ignition systems are locked to provide
antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to
turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while
turning the key until it turns easily. To remove the key,
depress and hold the release button located between the
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the igni-
tion key to LOCK and remove the key.
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
Ignition Key Release Button
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no
more than 1/2 turn in either direction and the key is not
in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel:
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ON positions, and the
brake pedal is depressed.
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2)
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is consid-
ered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock
cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two (2) seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-
viced as soon as possible.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN. This number is required for dealer
replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be per-
formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A
blank key is one which has never been programmed and
needs to be cut.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid keys by doing the following:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light
will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Theft
Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing, turn on again
for 3 seconds, and then turn off.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless
Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this
procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to a
total of 8 keys. If you do not have a programmed sentry
key, contact your dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
system provides both audible and visual signals. For the
first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights
and security telltale will flash repeatedly. For an addi-
tional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale
will flash. The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key
is used to start the vehicle. Use of the Sentry Key will
disable the alarm.
Rearming of the System:
The security system will rearm itself after the 15 addi-
tional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing,
if the system has not been disabled. If the condition
which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will
ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors
and ignition.
To Set the Alarm:
The alarm will set when you use the power door locks, or
use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After
all the doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in
the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
system is arming. The security light in the instrument
panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to
indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,
the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate
that the system is armed.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the SECURITY light stays on continuously
during vehicle operation, have the system checked by
your dealer.
To Disarm the System:
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the door. If
something has triggered the system in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors
and the security lamp will flash for 30 seconds. Check the
vehicle for tampering.
The Security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unpro-
grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine
will run for 2 seconds and then the security alarm will be
initiated. To exit alarming mode, press the transmitter
Unlock button, or start the vehicle with a programmed
Sentry Key.
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
will sound when you pull the door handle to exit. The
door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open the doors. This feature is only
available if you have Remote Keyless Entry.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned on.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console, door courtesy
lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in the
interior lights ON position (extreme top position).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
•
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held
radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the
illuminated entry will initiate, the parking lights will
flash on twice and if installed, the cargo lamp will turn on
for 30 seconds.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or
drivers door only upon the first UNLOCK button press
by using the following procedure:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual
for details.
Three Button Transmitter
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on your key.
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
4. Release both buttons at the same time.
5. This will enable you to unlock all doors on the first
press of the UNLOCK button.
6. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are
locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn
will chirp once.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual
for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly
plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the PANIC button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
the park lamp flash feature activated. If desired, this
feature can be disabled by using the following procedure:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual
for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
3. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the LOCK button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Using the Panic Alarm
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
and the horn will sound.
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
button on the transmitter a second time, after 5 seconds.
Panic mode will automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if
the vehicle is started and exceeds 15 mph. During the
Panic Mode, the door locks and remote keyless entry
systems will function normally. Panic mode will not
disarm the security system on vehicles so equipped.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of the
batteries is from one to two years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Transmitter Battery Service
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 bat-
tery.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, remove the
small screw, and separate the two halves of the transmit-
ter. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during
removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on battery to the + sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test transmitter operation.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks — If Equipped
Front and Rear doors may be locked, by moving the lock
plunger up or down.
All doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock plunger. Doors locked before
closing will remain locked when closed.
The ignition key will unlock all the locks on your vehicle.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks – If Equipped
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph.
Automatic Door Lock Programming
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
following procedure:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 3
of this manual for details.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times; ending in the LOCK position (do not start the
engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle
has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle
has been driven (shifted out of Park and all doors closed).
This feature will not operate if there is any manual
operation of the power door locks (Lock or Unlock).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Auto Unlock On Exit Programming — If Equipped
Customer Programming sequence to enable or disable
the Auto Unlock Feature:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 3
of this manual for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chimes that may be confusing during this program-
ming procedure).
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times ending in the LOCK position (do not start the
engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of
this feature.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat
the above procedure.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child-
protection door lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, slide the lever UP
to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage the child-
protection locks. When the system on a door is engaged,
that door can only be opened by using the outside door
handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
Child Protection Door Lock Location
Child Lock Control
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
WINDOWS
Power Windows – If Equipped
The control on the left front door panel has up-down
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control
Power Window Switches
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and on the rear doors of Quad Cab and Mega Cab
models. The windows will operate only when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON or ACC (Accessory)
position.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only)
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically.
Window Lockout Switch (4 Door Models Only)
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
Power Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped
The power sliding rear window switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls. Press the
right side of the switch to open the glass and the left side
of the switch to close the glass.
Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS (2500/3500/MEGA CAB
ONLY)
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, window bags for the driver and passengers
seated next to a window. If you will be carrying children
too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be
used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab front center
seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
1 — Latch Plate
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you
properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the
possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in
a collision, increasing head and neck injury. And a belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t
as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in
a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from
injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt.
The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
Latch Plate To Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your dealer and have it fixed.
Removing Slack From Belt
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the airbag deployed.
Standard Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
1. The front center seat belt on the Standard Cab may be
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the vehicle
ignition key into the center white slot on the black buckle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the
key is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor to take
up the surplus webbing, and the buckles will hang
vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all
the area behind the front seats.
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for the
proper seat belt usage.
WARNING!
•
If the black latch and black buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
•
When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.
Detaching Buckle with Key
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If the black latch and buckle are not connected when
the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not restrain you properly.
Inserting Latch Plate In Use Position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Press the button located on the
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the
position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Automatic Locking Restraint (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-
able on all passenger seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger
seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock-
ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Quad Cab front seat
has a lap belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen
the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack,
pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug
against the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust
the belt as tightly as is comfortable.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
•
A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
•
A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries is
greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt system in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control
module. Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the ignition is cycled, driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for
more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any
position except On or Start, buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the pro-
gramming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations
that allow less forceful deployments.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver and passengers in the first and second
row sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped
with window bags, they are located above the side
windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or
attempt to manually open them. You may damage the airbags
and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. These protective covers for the airbag cushions
are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not mount any aftermarket equipment such as trailer
brake controllers, snowplow controllers, auxiliary light
switches, radios, etc. on or behind the knee bolster. Knee
bolsters are designed to work with the air bag and seat belt
to protect you. Mounting any additional equipment on or
behind the knee bolster can cause injury during a crash.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location
of the window bag. The area where the window bag is
located should remain free from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not have
any accessory items installed which will alter the roof,
including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with the seatbelts, front airbags work with the instrument
panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for
the driver and front passenger. Window bags also work
with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is so equipped,
the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
types of collisions, both the front and side airbags may be
triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work,
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
•
Children 12 years and under should ride buckled up in
a rear seat, if available.
•
Infants in rear facing child restraints must NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
airbag unless the airbag is turned off (Standard Cab
Vehicles Only). An airbag deployment can cause se-
vere injury or death to infants in that position. See the
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch section.
•
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat, see the
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch section.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see section on Child Restraints)
should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat.
Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
•
All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
•
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to
inflate.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause seri-
ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
If the vehicle has window airbags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Airbag Control Module
•
AIRBAG Readiness Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Passenger Airbag
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Crash Sensor
•
Interconnecting Wiring
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON/OFF Switch (Stan-
dard Cab Vehicles Only)
The Window Airbag System, on vehicles equipped,
consists of the following:
•
AIRBAG Readiness Light (shared with the front airbag
system)
•
Window Bags Above the Side Windows.
•
Airbag Control Module (shared with the front airbag
system)
•
Side impact sensors
•
Interconnecting Wiring
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How The Airbag System Works
•
The airbag control module determines if a frontal
collision is severe enough to require the airbags to
inflate.
•
The airbag control module will not detect roll over, or
rear collisions.
•
The airbag control module also monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions.
These include all of the items listed above except the
knee bolsters, the instrument panel, and the steering
wheel and column. If the key is in the ⬙Off⬙ position, in
the ACC position or not in the ignition, the airbags are
not on and will not inflate
•
The airbag control module also turns on the AIR BAG
light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds when
the ignition is first turned on, then turns the light off.
•
If it detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the light either momen-
tarily or continuously. The instrument clus-
ter will flash the seat belt indicator if it
detects a fault with the airbag indicator.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIR BAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you
in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
•
When the airbag control module detects a collision
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the airbags. The airbag covers separate and fold out of
the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The
airbags fully inflate in milliseconds. This is less time
than it takes you to blink your eyes. The airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. The driver’s front airbag deflates
through vents towards the instrument panel. The
passenger’s front airbag is deflated through vent holes
in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags do
not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
•
The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees and
position you for the best interaction with the front
airbag.
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch (Standard Cab
Vehicles Only)
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the
passenger:
•
is an infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the
front seat because there is no rear seat, because the rear
seat is too small for a rear-facing infant restraint or
because the infant has a medical condition which
makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the
infant,
•
is a child, age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat
because there is no rear seat, because there is no rear
seat position available, or because the child has a
medical condition which makes it necessary for the
driver to be able to see the child,
•
has a medical condition which makes passenger airbag
inflation (deployment) a greater risk for the passenger
than the risk of hitting the dashboard (instrument
panel) or windshield in a crash.
WARNING!
Whenever an airbag is turned off, even a lap/
shoulder belted passenger may hit their head, neck,
or chest on the dashboard (instrument panel) or
windshield in a crash. This may result in serious
injury or death.
To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Ve-
hicles Only)
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn clockwise, and remove
the key from the switch. This will shut off the passenger
side airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
To Turn On the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Ve-
hicles Only)
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn counterclockwise, and
remove the key from the switch. This will turn on the
passenger airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will be
off when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the air bag
control module detects a moderate-to-severe frontal col-
lision, and then immediately to deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irrita-
tion, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your
doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-
sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Window Airbags Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)—If Equipped
The window airbag control module determines if a side
collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to
inflate. The window airbag control module will not
detect roll over, front or rear collisions.
The airbag control module monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition
switch is in the ⬙START⬙ or ⬙RUN⬙ positions. These
include all of the items listed above. The airbag control
module also turns on the AIRBAG light in the instrument
panel for 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition is first turned
on as a diagnostic or system check, then turns the light
off. If it detects a malfunction in any part of the system,
it turns on the light either momentarily or continuously.
The side (window) impact SRS Airbags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the airbag
control module detects a collision requiring the window
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of
the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
pushes the side pillar molding out of the way and covers
the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds
(about one-quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes)
with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the window bag inflates. This especially applies to
children. The window bag is only about 3
1
⁄
2
inches (8.9
cm) thick when it is inflated.
NOTE: At no time should any supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for
the best interaction with the front airbag.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
switch is turned off.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag Systems
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or frame.
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolster.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
•
The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
•
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse block
for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of
the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your
dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to 5-seconds of specific vehicle data parameters
(see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to
the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment,
and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration
data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data
are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly
deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn
more about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, govern-
ment officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora-
tion to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
•
Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
•
⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact acceleration and angle
•
Seatbelt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Transmission gear selection
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/stability control status
•
Tire pressure monitoring system status (if equipped)
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment
could cause severe injury or death to infants in this
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back,
they should use a belt-positioning-booster seat. The
child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped
with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the
lap portion.) For further information refer to
www.seatcheck.org.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat, or in the front seat if the
passenger’s front airbag is Off. If the airbag is left
On, a rearward facing child restraint in the front
seat may be struck by a deploying passenger
airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to
the infant.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR), which are designed to keep
the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that
it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to
allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide
the latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the belt
until it is all removed from the retractor. Allow the belt
to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess web-
bing to tighten the lap portion about the child re-
straint. Refer to the ⬙Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) Mode⬙ earlier in this section.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing
an infant or child restraint.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. LATCH child restraint
anchorage systems are installed in the Standard Cab
passenger seat position and the Quad Cab rear seat
outboard positions. LATCH equipped seating positions
feature both lower anchor bars, located at the back of the
seat cushion, and tether strap anchorages, located behind
the seatback (refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor later
in this section).
Identification dots are located above the standard cab
front seat lower anchorages as a guide for locating lower
anchors.
NOTE: For children riding in the front seat of a Stan-
dard Cab model refer to the “Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch” located in this section.
Standard Cab Passenger Seat
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
Quad Cab Rear Outboard Seats
Mega Cab Rear Seats
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
Installing the Child Restraint System
WARNING!
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad
Cab model rear seat. The LATCH anchorages in this
seat are designed for the two outboard seating posi-
tions only. A child may be placed in the rear center
seating position of a Quad Cab model using the seat
belt and child tether anchorage. Failure to follow this
may result in serious or fatal injury.
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con-
nection to tether anchors have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.
Regular Cab models of Ram Pickups have two tether
anchorages, one each behind the front center and right
seats. Quad Cab and Mega Cab models have three
anchorages, one behind each of the rear seats.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
positions directly behind the child seat to secure a
child restraint top tether strap. Follow the instruc-
tions below. See your dealer for help if necessary.
Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center
Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence
(Quad Cab Rear Seats)
1. Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and
reaching between the rear glass and rear seat. The tether
strap may be retained with an elastic band. Accessibility
to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat
cushion to the “up” position. Remove the elastic before
use.
2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the metal ring.
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
to the anchor directly behind the right seat.
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tether Anchorage Points at All Three Seating
Positions (Mega Cab)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
2. Lift the cover, and attach the hook to the square
opening in the sheet metal.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Mega Cab Tether Strap Mounting
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NEW ENGINE BREAK-IN
Your Cummins 24 Valve Turbo Diesel engine does not
require a break-in period due to its construction. Normal
operation is allowed, provided the following recommen-
dations are followed:
NOTE: Light duty operation such as light trailer towing
or no load operation, will extend the time before the
engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and
power may be seen at this time.
•
Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
•
Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged
periods.
•
Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent
engine lugging.
•
Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indica-
tors.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
•
Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carry-
ing or towing significant weight.
Because of the construction of the Cummins Diesel
engine, engine run-in is enhanced by loaded operating
conditions which allow the engine parts to achieve final
finish and fit during the first 6,000 miles (10 000 km).
CAUTION!
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) your new
vehicle is driven, do not tow a trailer. Doing so
may damage your vehicle.
•
Limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) during the
first 500 miles (805 km) of towing.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
This vehicle is designed to carry passengers in the cab
only. For safety reasons, NEVER TRANSPORT PASSEN-
GERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
Lock Your Vehicle
Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a
well-lighted area and never invite theft by leaving ar-
ticles of value exposed.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, a potentially
toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless. To
avoid inhaling these gases, the following precautions
should be observed:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in
or out of the area.
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for more than a short period, adjust
your climate control system to force outside air into
the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the
controls in any position except OFF or MAX A/C.
•
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system;
exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to
the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja-
cent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace or adjust as required.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Heater Defroster Ducts
Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation.
Check for proper air flow through all defroster ducts. If
there are any question regarding the operation of your
heater defroster ducts, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the front airbags have deployed. If there is any
question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the
belt.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer. If there is a problem with the airbag light the
seatbelt light will flash.
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
the tread.
Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
Lights
Check the operation of all exterior lights. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are
detected the cause should be located and corrected.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors ...............................84
▫ Inside Mirror .........................84
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror – If Equipped ....85
▫ Outside Mirrors .......................86
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature ...........86
▫ Electronic Power Mirrors – If Equipped ......87
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster And Heated
Sideview Mirrors – If Equipped ............88
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors – If Equipped ........88
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If
Equipped .............................89
▫ Operations ...........................91
▫ Phone Call Features ....................97
▫ UConnect™ System Features .............100
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............105
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System ....................107
▫ General Information ...................114
䡵 Seats ................................115
3
▫ 40-20-40 Front Seat ....................115
▫ Reclining Seats .......................116
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints ..............117
▫ Manual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment
— If Equipped .......................118
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ..............118
▫ Rear Seat Features — Mega Cab Models .....120
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............125
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood .............127
䡵 Lights ...............................128
▫ Interior Lights .......................129
▫ Battery Saver ........................130
▫ Headlamp Delay ......................130
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights .....130
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only
AndFleetVehicles) ....................131
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................132
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............132
▫ Cargo Light — If Equipped ..............132
▫ Multifunction Control Lever ..............133
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers ............135
▫ Windshield Wipers ....................135
▫ Windshield Washers ...................136
䡵 Tilt Steering Column ....................137
䡵 Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped ......138
▫ Adjustment .........................138
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ......139
▫ To Activate ..........................139
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed ...............140
▫ To Deactivate ........................140
▫ To Resume Speed .....................140
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............140
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............141
䡵 Overhead Console — If Equipped ...........142
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ................142
䡵 Overhead Console With Compass/Temperature
Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped ..........143
▫ US/M Button ........................143
▫ Reset Button .........................144
▫ Global Reset .........................144
▫ Step Button .........................144
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) ........145
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) ...............145
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) ..................146
▫ Elapsed Time (ET) .....................146
▫ C/T Button .........................146
▫ Automatic Compass Calibration ...........147
▫ Manual Compass Calibration .............147
▫ Recalibrating The Compass ..............148
▫ Outside Temperature ...................149
䡵 Overhead Console With Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — Diesel Only .....150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
3
▫ Dome/Reading Lights ..................150
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
— If Equipped .......................151
▫ Compass/Temperature Button ............157
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped .........160
▫ Programming HomeLink ................162
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 164
▫ Using HomeLink .....................165
▫ Erasing HomeLink Buttons ..............165
▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button . . . 165
▫ Security ............................166
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped .............166
▫ Open Sunroof - Express Mode ............167
▫ Comfort Stop ........................167
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express ...............168
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................168
▫ Pinch Protect Override .................168
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express ...............168
▫ Sunshade Operation ...................168
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................169
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................169
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed ...................169
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ..................169
䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver ............171
䡵 Cupholders ...........................172
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (40–20–40
Seats) — Automatic Transmission ..........172
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (Bucket
Seats) — Automatic Transmission ..........174
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders
— Manual Transmission ................174
▫ Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab
— If Equipped .......................175
▫ Rear Cupholder — Mega Cab ............175
䡵 Storage ..............................176
▫ Center Storage Compartment (40–20–40 Seat)
— If Equipped .......................176
▫ Center Storage Compartment (Bucket Seats)
— If Equipped .......................177
▫ Storage And Seats (Quad Cab Models) ......179
▫ Storage And Seats (Mega Cab Models) ......179
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Mega Cab Models) ....................181
䡵 Rear Window Features ...................181
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster And Heated
Side View Mirrors — If Equipped ..........181
▫ Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . . 182
▫ Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped .......182
䡵 Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped .........183
䡵 Pickup Box ...........................186
䡵 Slide-In Campers .......................188
▫ Camper Applications ...................188
䡵 Easy-Off Tailgate .......................188
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
3
MIRRORS
Inside Mirror
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Adjusting Rear View Mirror
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror – If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light in the button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in a right side convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on your right side
convex mirror could cause you to collide with an-
other vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the right side convex mirror. Some vehicles will not
have a convex right side mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All6x9inchexterior mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
rearward, and normal.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electronic Power Mirrors – If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
Set the top switch to the left or right for the left or right
mirror, and set it to the center off position to prevent
accidentally moving a mirror when you are finished
adjusting the mirror. To adjust a mirror, select left or right
with the top switch, and press one of the four arrows for
the direction you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
Power Mirror Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
Sideview Mirrors – If Equipped
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,
with the ignition On. Turning Off the rear window
defroster or the ignition will deactivate the Electric Rear
Window Defroster and Heated side view mirrors feature.
These features turn off automatically after 15 minutes
have elapsed for the first activation per ignition cycle.
Each subsequent activation of these features per ignition
cycle will shutoff automatically after 10 minutes have
elapsed. To reactivate, simply press the button again.
Trailer Towing Mirrors – If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-
board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or
In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main
mirror surface.
NOTE: Fold the7x10inch trailer towing mirrors
rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.
Blindspot Mirror
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
Trailer Towing Position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
UConnect™ Switches
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UCon-
nect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play all
the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
NOTE:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
•
When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
•
System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
•
For example, you can say “234-567-8901.” The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the Country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long,
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest
valid phone number has ten digits.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.⬙
•
System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
book. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
3
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also
exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the ‘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
•
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-
tem.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
•
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
For command translations and alternate commands in
supported languages, refer to “Command Translations”
at the end of this section.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as compared to that
for the cell phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon-
nect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
phone system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound3746#,youcanpressthe’VoiceRecognition’
button and say ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two procedures: From
outside the UConnect mode (e.g. from radio mode),
•
Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5
seconds until the session begins, or
•
Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Setup,
Voice Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may
be compromised with roof top down.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
•
Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
•
UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows, and
•
dry weather condition.
•
Operation from driver seat.
•
In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may
be compromised with roof top down.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
•
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
mended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
North American English
Primary Alternate(s)
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Star (*)
Plus (+)
Pound (#)
Add Location
All
Call
Cancel
Confirmation Prompts
Continue
Delete
Dial
Edit
Emergency
English
Erase All
Espanol
Francais
Help
Home
Language
List names
List phones
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
Mobile
Mute
Mute off
New entry
No
Pager
Pair a phone
Phone pairing Pairing
Phonebook Phone book
Previous
Record again
Redial
Return to main menu Return. Main menu
Select phone Select
Send
Set up Phone settings / Phone
set up
Towing assistance
Transfer call
Try again
Voice training
Work
Yes
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
The seating options available in this truck are the result of
extensive customer research and evaluations.
Seats are also a primary part of the Occupant Restraint
(protection) System of the vehicle. They need to be used
properly for safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
40-20-40 Front Seat
As the name implies, the seat is divided into 3 segments.
The outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total
width of the seat. The back of the center portion (20%)
easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
compartment (if equipped).
Manual Seat Adjuster
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
Each outboard seat is independently adjustable forward
or rearward and is equipped with a back recliner. The
manual forward or rearward seat adjustment handle is
found at the front edge of each seat cushion. Pull up on
the handle and slide the seat to get the most comfortable
position.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Reclining Seats
The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion.
Pull up on the handle, as shown, to release the seat back
and adjust for comfort.
Manual Recline Lever
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You can be seriously, even fatally, injured riding in a
seat with the seatback reclined. Do not ride with the
seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no
longer resting against your chest. If you ride in this
position, the shoulder harness will no longer be
restraining you. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries.
Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of neck injury in the
event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down on
the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical, at least to the level of the ears.
To lower the head restraint, push in the button and then
push down on the head restraint.
Head Restraints
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
Manual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped
Rotating the lumbar control knob on the left side of the
driver’s seatback and on the right side of the passenger’s
seatback increases or decreases the lumbar (lower back)
support.
Power Seats — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Don’t put anything under a power seat. It may cause
damage to the seat controls.
Manual Lumbar Adjustment
Power Seat Switch
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the
front seat cushions. Three switches control the seat move-
ment. The four-way switch in the center can be moved
forward or backwards to get the most comfortable posi-
tion. The same switch can be moved up and down to
control seat height. Change the seat angle by using the
two toggle switches, tilting it up or down.
Up, Down, Forward, and Rearward
Tilt Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
Rear Seat Features — Mega Cab Models
Reclining Rear Seats — Mega Cab Models
The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion.
Pull up on the handle, as shown, to release the seat back
and adjust for comfort.
Folding Rear Seat (Table Mode) — Mega Cab
Models
Both the left and right rear seat backs can be folded down
and used as a table.
To fold either rear seat back down (Table Mode), lift the
handle and fold the seat back forward. Simply lift the seat
back to return the seat to the upright position. Verify that
it is locked in place.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Table Mode Handle Table Mode
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
Folding Rear Seat (Kneel Mode) — Mega Cab
Models
Both the left and right rear seats can be folded flat (Kneel
Mode) and used for carrying cargo. Each of the rear seat
backs provide 2 D-rings and each of the rear storage bin
lids provide 2 slotted cutouts. Use a cargo tie down to
secure cargo in the cargo carrying area.
Securing Cargo
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can fly
around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the
vehicle, causing serious injury or possible death.
Secure cargo with a cargo tie down using the D-Rings
provided on the back of the seats and the slotted
cutouts in the rear storage bin lid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
NOTE: The rear seat will drop and move forward in
Kneel Mode.
To fold either rear seat flat (Kneel Mode), lift the handle
and fold the seat forward. Simply lift the seat back to
return the seat to the upright position. Verify that it is
locked in place.
Kneel Mode Handle
Kneel Mode
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat switches are located in the instrument
panel under the climate controls.
Each heated seat switch has two settings (HI and LOW).
Press the switch once to obtain High heat level, then
press the switch again to obtain Low heat level. Pressing
the switch a third time will turn the heated seats OFF. If
you do not purposefully turn the switch OFF, the seat
heating level will automatically change to the next lower
Heated Seat Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
level, or OFF. The High heat level operates for 30 minutes
(approximate), the Low heat level operates for 30 min-
utes (approximate). The seat heat will also turn OFF
when the ignition is turned OFF. Both of the indicators
ON identifies High heat level. The lower indicator On
only, identifies Low heat level. Flashing indicator lights
on the switch indicate that the Heated Seat System needs
servicing.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at
the base of the instrument panel. Once the hood is
released you must reach into the opening beneath the
center of the grille and push up the latch to release the
safety catch before raising the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Hood Release Lever
Secondary Latch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before
driving.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch Location
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
upward detent position, or if equipped, when the UN-
LOCK button is pressed on the key fob. When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehi-
cle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are re-
quired during the day.
Quad Cab models may have an optional switched dome
lamp that may be operated by pressing the lens.
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shed-
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 10
minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlamps remain on while the ignition is cycled
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8
minutes. If the headlamps are turned on and left on for 8
minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Headlamp Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlamp delay that will leave the headlamps on for 90
seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
turned OFF while the headlamp switch is on, and then
the headlamp switch is cycled off. Headlamp delay can
be cancelled by either turning the headlamp switch ON
then OFF or by turning the ignition ON.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are all turned on. The headlights will turn ON
when the switch is rotated to the second position.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only and Fleet
Vehicles)
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except park. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙ con-
dition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illumi-
nate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking
brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn
off.
Light Switch Rotation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left
on, after the ignition is turned off, a chime will sound
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The foglights are turned ON by placing the head-
light rotary control in the parking light or head-
light position and pushing in the headlight rotary
control. The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are ON or when the vehicle headlights are ON low
beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights
will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time,
when the headlight switch is rotated to the OFF position,
or the high beam is selected.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the
CARGO button. The interior lights will also turn on
when the cargo lights are on. The cargo lights will also
turn on for 30 seconds when a key fob Unlock is pressed,
as part of the illuminated entry feature.
Cargo Light Switch
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Control Lever
The multifunction control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or
left-hand turn.
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If a defective bulb
or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system, the
arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the switch or indicator lamp is defective.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down.
Turn Signal Auto-Mode
Tap the multi-function control lever once and the turn
signal (left or right) will flash 3 times, and automatically
turn off.
Turn Signal Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or
LOW beam.
High Beam / Low Beam
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to
select the desired wiper speed.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LOW continual speed position. The delay
can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
Windshield Wiper / Washer Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while
in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately
three wipes, after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, pull rearward on the lever below the
turn signal control and move the wheel up or down, as
desired. Push the lever forward to lock the column firmly
in place.
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
Tilt Steering Control Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow
the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to
the steering wheel and pedals.
Adjustment
1. Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10
inches (254 mm) away from the airbag located in the
center of the steering wheel.
2. Fasten and adjust the seatbelts.
3. Move the adjustable pedal switch, located to the left of
the steering column near the parking brake release, in the
direction you desire to move the pedals.
4. The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse) or when the Speed Control is SET.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over accelerator opera-
tion at speeds greater than 35 mph (56 km/h). The
controls are mounted on the steering wheel.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. An indi-
cator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the
system is on.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle, or pressing the CAN-
CEL button will deactivate speed control without erasing
the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF
position or turning off the ignition erases the memory.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the sys-
tem OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
30 mph (50 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the
button is released, a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result ina2mph
(3km/h) speed increase. Each time the button is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the button three times
will increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph (2
km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped,
speed will decrease. For example, tapping the button 3
times will decrease the speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press
and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
ft. (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph (56
km/h), the speed control will automatically disengage. If
this happens, you can push down on the accelerator
pedal to maintain the desired speed.
Vehicles equipped with a 6–speed manual transmission
should be operated in 4th or 5th gear under the above
conditions.
Vehicles equipped with a 4–speed automatic transmis-
sion may exhibit several 4-3 downshifts under the above
conditions. To reduce the frequency of the downshifts
and to improve vehicle performance, it is advisable to
lock out overdrive by pressing the O/D OFF button
located at the end of the gear shifter.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The two optional overhead consoles may consist of the
following features:
•
Courtesy/Reading Lights
•
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
— If Equipped
•
Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
Courtesy/Reading Lights
In the middle of the console are two courtesy/reading
lights.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned off, they will
extinguish after 15 minutes.
Overhead Console Features
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER
— IF EQUIPPED
This optional overhead console consists of the following:
•
Courtesy Lights
•
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
This overhead console allows you to choose between a
compass/temperature display and one of four trip con-
ditions being monitored.
US/M Button
Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric
measurement units.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
RESET Button
Use this button to reset the following displays:
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Trip Odometer (ODO)
Elapsed time (ET)
Global Reset
If the RESET button is pressed twice within 2 seconds
while in any of the 3 resettable displays (AVG ECO,
ODO, ET), the Global Reset will reset all 3 displays.
Step Button
Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip
conditions.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average fuel economy is a running average of the
amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has
traveled.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will momen-
tarily blank. Then, the history information will be erased,
and the averaging will continue from where it was before
the reset. The reset value is based on a minimal amount
of fuel used and the distance traveled from the previous
drive cycle. The display may take several miles for this
value to change dependent upon driving habits.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to an
alternating test display of “LO” and “FUEL”. This dis-
play will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel.
Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will
turn off the “LO FUEL” text and a new DTE value will be
displayed, based on the current values in the DTE
calculation and the current fuel tank level.
NOTE: It is possible for DTE to display “LO FUEL”
before the low fuel warning light turns on in the instru-
ment cluster. This could occur because low fuel warning
is set to a specified fuel tank volume and DTE is an
estimated distance calculation based on fuel economy
and remaining fuel tank volume.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:
•
26 gallons - 1500 short box models
•
34 gallons - 1500 Quad Cab (if equipped)/2500/3500
short box models
•
35 gallons - 1500/2500/3500 long box models
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Resetting of this screen will cause the trip odometer
to change to Zero.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset. Resetting the Elapsed Time will cause
the display to change to Zero.
C/T Button
Use this button to select a readout of the outside tem-
perature and one of eight compass headings that indicate
the direction in which the vehicle is facing.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per-
sonal injury or property damage.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.
After completing up to three 360° turns, with the vehicle
traveling less than 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn
off and the compass will function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
sure the compass variance is properly set before manu-
ally calibrating the compass.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
“Calibration” mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
Recalibrating The Compass
Turn on the ignition and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL sym-
bol is displayed complete one 360° turn in an area free
from large metal objects or power lines. The CAL symbol
will turn off and the compass will function normally.
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the country,
the difference between magnetic and geographic north is
great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.
If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according
to the Compass Variance Map.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The default for the compass variance is zone 8.
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the
RESET button approximately five seconds. The last vari-
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the new variance zone and press the
RESET button to resume normal operation.
Outside Temperature
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located un-
derhood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature, therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30
km/h) or during stop and go driving.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
3
OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH ELECTRONIC
VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) —
DIESEL ONLY
The overhead console contains dome/reading lights, and
an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Dome/Reading Lights
Located in the overhead console are two dome/reading
lights.
The dome/reading lights illuminate when a door is
opened or when the interior lights are turned on by
rotating the dimmer control located on the Headlight
Switch.
The reading lights are activated by pressing on the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
NOTE: The dome/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle.
Dome/Reading Lights
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped
Pressing the menu button will change the
display to one of the following features:
Trip Functions
Pressing the STEP button allows you to scroll through
one of the following Trip Function features:
•
TRIP – Shows the total distance traveled since the last
reset. To reset the TRIP function, press and hold the
RESET button.
•
ELAPSED TIME – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START
positions.
•
UNIT IN US/METRIC – Press the RESET button to
toggle between US and METRIC.
•
AVG. MPG – Shows the average fuel economy since
the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the
display will show dashes for two seconds. Then the
history information will be erased, and the averaging
will continue from the last fuel average reading before
Overhead Console with EVIC
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
the reset. (Example: If your Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) displays 18 AVG. MPG and the
RESET button is pressed, the previous averaging his-
tory will be erased and the display will return to the 18
AVG. MPG, not to 0 AVG. MPG). The display may take
several miles for the value to change dependent upon
driving habits.
•
MI TO EMPTY (Distance To Empty) – Shows the
estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel
remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of fuel economy,
according to the current fuel tank level. MI TO EMPTY
cannot be reset through the RESET button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
•
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will
display.
System Status (EVIC Displays)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages:
•
TURN SIGNALS ON (with a continuous warning
chime)
•
PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE – Vehicle
Not in Park or Vehicle in Motion (manual transmis-
sions only)
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more,
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
•
LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with
a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
•
DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
LOW WASHER FLUID (with a single chime)
•
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED (with a single chime)
•
CATALYST FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL
•
CATALYST STAT lllllll 90%
•
CATALYST FULL SERVICE REQUIRED
•
SERVICE AIR FILTER
•
PERFORM SERVICE
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK. If the trans-
mission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT
AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
Press and release the menu button until the
Personal Settings displays on the EVIC.
Use the STEP button to display one of the following:
•
“LANGUAGE” – When in this display you may select
one of three languages for all display nomenclature,
including the trip functions. Press the RESET button
while in this display to select English, Espanol, or
Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will
display in the selected language.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
•
“AUTO DOOR LOCKS > YES” – When ON is selected,
all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your
selection, press and release the RESET button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
•
“AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT > YES” – When ON is
selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
•
“RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st” – When DRV DR 1st is
selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. When
Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the
remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “DRV DR 1st ” appears.
•
“RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST” – When All ALL DR
1ST is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first
press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until “All DR 1st” appears.
•
“SOUND HORN W/LOCK > YES” – When ON is
selected, a short horn sound will occur when the
remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
•
“FLASH LIGHTS w/LOCK > YES” – When ON is
selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
selected. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
•
“HEAD LAMP OFF DELAY > 0 SEC” – When this
feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the
headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
appears.
•
“KEY OFF POWER DELAY > OFF” – When this
feature is selected, the power window switches, radio,
hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets
will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle door
will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5
min.,” “10 min appears.
•
“ILLUMINATED APRCH > OFF” – When this feature
is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on
for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with
the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your
selection, press and release the RESET button until
“OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
NOTE: If this feature is enabled, the headlamps will be
on during the engine pre-heat and cold crank; therefore,
it is recommended that the feature be disabled when
overnight ambient temperature is at or below 20F (-7C) to
prevent excessive drain on batteries during cold cranking
•
“UNIT IN > US/METRIC” – The EVIC, odometer can
be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
•
“COMPASS VARIANCE > 1” – Press the RESET
button to change the compass variance setting. Refer
to Compass Variance, in this section for additional
information.
•
“COMPASS CALIBRATE > YES” – Press the RESET
button to calibrate the compass. Refer to Manual
Compass Calibration, in this section for additional
information.
•
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. This system will alert you when it is
time to change your engine oil by displaying the
words “Oil Change Required” on your Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Oil Change Indicator – Reset (If Equipped)
To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following proce-
dure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine)..
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
PERFORM SERVICE — Your vehicle will require emis-
sions maintenance at a set interval. To help remind you
when this maintenance is due, the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display “Perform Ser-
vice”. When the “Perform Service” message is dis-
played on the EVIC it is necessary to have the emis-
sions maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance
includes replacing the Closed Crankcase Ventilation
(CCV) filter element, cleaning or replacement of the
EGR Cooler, and cleaning or replacement of the EGR
Valve. The procedure for clearing and resetting the
⬙Perform Service⬙ indicator message is located in the
appropriate Service Information.
Compass/Temperature Button
Pressing the Compass/Temperature button
will return the display to the normal compass/
temperature display.
NOTE: Temperature accuracy can be effected from heat
soak. For best accuracy, the vehicle should be driven at a
speed greater than 25 mph (40 km/h) for several min-
utes.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
3
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press the menu button until Personal Settings is dis-
played.
3. Press the STEP button until “Calibrate Compass YES”
is displayed.
4. Press and release the RESET button to start the cali-
bration. The message “CAL” will display in the EVIC.
5. Slowly drive the vehicle 5 mph in a complete 360°
circle (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects)
until the “CAL” message turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press the menu button until Personal Settings is dis-
played.
3. Press the STEP button until “Compass Variance” is
displayed.
4. Press and release RESET button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the compass button to exit.
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
HomeLink威 Programming Buttons
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features it could cause
injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on
the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recom-
mended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the indicator light begins to flash (after
20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30
seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
Outer HomeLink buttons
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held trans-
mitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-
gramming⬙ section.
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from the
slow to the rapid flash.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete and your device
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, continue with ⴖProgram-
mingⴖ steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manu-
facturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
eight.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
3
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Program-
ming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ step 3 with the following:
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (⬙cycle⬙)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step four to complete.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-
3515.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ -
note below), follow the step noted:
•
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30
seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)
mode and can be programmed at any time beginning
with ⬙Programming⬙ - step 2.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.
Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step 2
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the green light begins to
flash.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
NOTE: The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow
the power sunroof to operate for ten minutes after the
ignition is turned off.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Open Sunroof - Express Mode
Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate
the Express Open Feature, causing the sunroof to open
automatically. During the Express Open operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will
remain in a partial open position. Again, momentarily
pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express
Open Feature.
Comfort Stop
The sunroof is equipped with an intermediate “Comfort
Stop” position. This is the first stop that express open
reaches. This is designed to reduce wind buffeting at
vehicle speeds between 20 - 40 mph (32 - 64 km/h).
Pressing the switch momentarily rearward again will
open the sunroof to its full open position however wind
buffeting can occur at full open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
3
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and
will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary electrical outlet can provide power for in
cab accessories designed for use with the standard “cigar
lighter” plug. The outlet is located in the instrument
panel below and to the right of the Climate Control
Panel. A cap is attached to the outlet base indicating
“Power Outlet” 12V-20A.
There is an additional Power Outlet inside the center
console of vehicles equipped with 40/20/40, or Bucket
front seats. There is also a Power Outlet located on the
rear of the center console for Quad Cab or Mega Cab
vehicles (only) equipped with bucket seats.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
3
The outlet(s) has/have a fused direct feed from the
battery so it/they receive power whether the ignition is
ON or OFF.
All accessories connected to this/these outlet(s) should
be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use
to protect the battery against discharge.
NOTE: If desired, all of the power outlets can be
converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
with the ignition switch in the ON position only.
CAUTION!
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER
The removable ash receiver is located in the instrument
panel cup holder tray.
The cigar lighter is located on the instrument panel,
above and to the left of the ash receiver.
As a child safety precaution, the lighter only operates
with the ignition switch ON. It heats when pushed in and
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the
heating position.
Ash Tray Automatic Transmission
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
3
CUPHOLDERS
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (40–20–40
Seats) — Automatic Transmission
Your new Ram truck is equipped with two adjustable
cupholders. The cupholder is opened by pulling on the
cup holder door handle, on the front surface. Each
opening in the cupholder is adjustable and will hold cups
and mugs of various sizes.
To secure the cup, place the cup to be held into one of the
cup wells and then push the cupholder arm toward the
cup until it is held stable.
Ash Tray Manual Transmission
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cup Holder Door Handle Cup Holders Automatic Transmission
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (Bucket
Seats) — Automatic Transmission
If your new Ram truck is equipped with bucket seats
there are three cup holders located on the front of the
center console.
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Manual
Transmission
Cup Holders Bucket Seat
Cup Holders Manual Transmission
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab — If Equipped
Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear cup-
holder that consists of two cupwells for rear passenger
convenience.
Rear Cupholder — Mega Cab
Mega Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders
located in the center armrest.
Mega Cab Rear Armrest Cup Holder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
3
STORAGE
Center Storage Compartment (40–20–40 Seat) —
If Equipped
The center portion of the seat folds down to provide an
armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid.
Push the button on the front of the armrest to raise the
cover. Inside there is a power outlet (if equipped),
removable coin holder (if equipped), and two dividers to
configure the storage area into compartments. For ex-
ample, compartments can be configured to hold a lap-top
computer, a cellular telephone, CD’s and miscellaneous
items. The top of the cover provides a generous firm
surface to serve as a desktop for your “mobile office.”
WARNING!
•
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or an accident. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
•
In an accident, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5
kg). These items could be thrown about endanger-
ing occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should
not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Center Storage Compartment (Bucket Seats)— If
Equipped
Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise
the upper cover. Inside is a power outlet (if equipped), a
cut out for a cell phone charger cord, removable coin
holder (if equipped), and a divider to configure the
Center Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3
storage area into separate compartments. Lift the lower
handle on the front of the armrest, and raise the armrest
for access to the lower storage bin. On Quad Cab and
Mega Cab models the rear of the floor console offers a
power outlet, a tip out bin and a rear air duct (Mega Cab
Only).
WARNING!
•
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or an accident. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
•
In an accident, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5
kg). These items could be thrown about endanger-
ing occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should
not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage and Seats (Quad Cab Models)
Located in the center of the front 40/20/40 seat cushion
there is a storage compartment.
Standard cab models also have storage behind the seat.
The Quad Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seat. Lift the seat to access the storage compart-
ment.
Storage and Seats (Mega Cab Models)
The Mega Cab models provide additional storage behind
the rear seat.
To gain access to the Mega Cab rear storage, fold the rear
seats to the “kneel position”. (See page 122 for more information.
information.)
Quad Cab Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
3
Push down on the front of the storage compartment
handle and lift the storage compartment cover.
The rear storage compartment can be divided into three
separate compartments by using the divider doors inside
the storage compartment.
Mega Cab Rear Storage Compartment Handle
Mega Cab Rear Storage Dividers
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Mega Cab
Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind
the rear seat.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated Side
view Mirrors — If Equipped
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,
with the ignition On. Turning Off the ignition will
deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and
Heated side view mirrors feature. These features also
turn off after activation, when 15 minutes have elapsed.
To reactivate, simply press the button again.
Grocery Bag Hooks
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
3
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The power sliding rear window switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls. Press the
right side of the switch to open the glass and the left side
of the switch to close the glass.
Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED
Quad Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat, may be
equipped with a folding load floor.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you
may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,
or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor
may move around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
Quad Cab Rear 60/40 Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3
Unfolding the Load Floor
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor
Load Floor In Open Position
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under
the Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
Load Floor Securing Straps
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box on your new Ram has many features
designed for utility and convenience.
NOTE: If you are installing a toolbox to the front of the
pickup box, you must use Mopar威 toolbox brackets
available from your dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of ply-
wood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber
across the box in the indentations provided above the
wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the
floor.
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur-
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
Pickup Box Features
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds
may need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough
roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo
that may result in vehicle damage. If wide build-
ing materials are to be frequently carried, the
installation of a support is recommended. This
will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to the
pickup box floor.
•
If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse, sup-
ports must be installed to transfer the weight of
the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage
may result. The use of proper supports will permit
loading up to the rated payload.
•
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an
accident causing serious or fatal injury.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel
housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side
to side to create separate load compartments in the
pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of
the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs (450
kg) total.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing” document available from your dealer. For safety
reasons, follow all instructions in this important docu-
ment.
NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop
Light) must be provided.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed quickly. If the truck is a 3500
dual rear wheel model, unplug the tailgate wire harness
from under the rear of the truck and pull the harness out
of the cargo box access hole. Unlatch the tailgate and
remove the support cables by releasing the lock tang
from the pivot, then rotate and pull away from the box.
Once the cables are free, move to the right side of the
tailgate hinge bracket.
Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
pivot clears the hanger bracket. Slide the entire tailgate to
the right to free the left side pivot. Remove the tailgate
from the vehicle entirely. Do not carry the tailgate loose in
the truck pickup box.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Dual rear wheel pickup models require properly
spaced rear clearance lights. If such a vehicle is operated
without a tailgate, suitable lights must be installed.
Tailgate Open
Tailgate Support Strap Attachment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
3
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap
or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of
leaks.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instruments And Controls .................195
䡵 Instrument Cluster ......................196
▫ Instrument Cluster – 5.9L Diesel Engine .....196
▫ Instrument Cluster – 6.7L Diesel Engine .....197
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description .............198
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock ..................207
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................207
䡵 Radio General Information ................207
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals .................207
▫ Two Types Of Signals ..................208
▫ Electrical Disturbances ..................208
▫ AM Reception .......................208
▫ FM Reception ........................208
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands
Free Phone Capability ...................209
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......209
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode .........213
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .....215
4
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone
— If Equipped .......................216
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio
— If Equipped .......................216
䡵 Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio
With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone,
And Vehicle Entertainment Systems (VES)
Capabilities ...........................217
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......217
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD
Audio Play) .........................222
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For CD
Audio Play) .........................224
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............226
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3
Audio Play) .........................228
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 228
䡵 Sales Code RAK – AM/FM/Cassette/CD (6-Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free
Phone, Video, MP3, And WMA Capabilities ....231
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......231
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player .......235
▫ Seek Button .........................235
▫ Fast Forward (FF) .....................236
▫ Rewind (RW) ........................236
▫ TapeEject...........................236
▫ Scan Button .........................236
▫ Changing Tape Direction ................236
▫ MetalTapeSelection ...................236
▫ Pinch Roller Release ...................236
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Noise Reduction ......................237
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD
Audio Play) .........................237
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For CD
Audio Play) .........................238
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............240
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3
And WMA Audio Play) .................242
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 And
WMAPlay) .........................242
䡵 Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc) Radio
With Navigation System ..................245
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) ........................245
▫ REC Setting The Clock .................245
▫ Audio Clock Display ...................248
䡵 Video Entertainment System (Sales Code XRV)
— If Equipped .........................249
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped ..............249
▫ System Activation .....................249
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) ....................250
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, RAQ, And
RAK Radios .........................251
▫ Selecting a Channel ....................251
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels ......252
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
— If Equipped .......................252
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ .....................252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
4
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ .....................252
▫ Satellite Antenna ......................252
▫ Reception Quality .....................253
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped ...........................253
▫ Radio Operation ......................254
▫ Tape Player .........................254
▫ CD Player ..........................254
䡵 Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance .......255
䡵 Compact Disc Maintenance ................256
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ........256
䡵 Climate Controls .......................257
▫ Heater Only — If Equipped ..............257
▫ Air Conditioning And Heating
— If Equipped .......................259
▫ Air Conditioning With Dual Zone Temperature
Control — If Equipped .................262
▫ Operating Tips .......................267
▫ Operating Tips Chart ...................269
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster – 5.9L Diesel Engine
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster – 6.7L Diesel Engine
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Check Gages
This light illuminates when the Voltmeter, Engine
Oil Pressure or Engine Coolant Temperature
gages indicate a reading either too high or too low.
Examine the gages carefully, and follow the instructions
contained below for each indicated problem.
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the
Fuel Gage, Voltmeter, Oil Pressure and Engine Coolant
Temperature gages may not show accurate readings.
When the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch
to ON to obtain accurate readings.
2. Voltmeter
When the engine is running, the gauge indicates
the electrical system voltage. The pointer should
stay within the normal range if the battery is charged. If
the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the electrical sys-
tem should be serviced.
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound.
NOTE:
•
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at vari-
ous engine temperatures. This cycling operation is
caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold
heater system. The number of cycles and the length of
the cycling operation is controlled by the engine
control module. Post-heat operation can run for sev-
eral minutes, and then the electrical system and volt-
meter needle will stabilize.
•
The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of
the headlamps, interior lamps, and also a noticeable
reduction in blower motor speed.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Turn Signal Indicators
Lights in instrument cluster flash when outside turn
signals are operating.
4. Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer at high rpm for extended periods. Engine
damage may occur.
5. Airbag Indicator Light
The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 seconds
when the ignition is first turned on. If the light stays on,
flickers or comes on while driving, have the airbag
system checked by an authorized dealer.
6. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that headlights are on high
beam.
7. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on
continuously. Refer to ⬙Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Re-
minder System (BeltAlert™)⬙ in the Occupant Restraints
section for more information. (See page 33 for more information.)
information.)
8. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
4
9. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil pres-
sure when the engine is running. A continuous
high or low reading, under normal driving conditions,
may indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immedi-
ate service should be obtained. (See page 414 for more information.)
information.)
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound.
10. Transfer Case Position
(See page 306 for more information.)
11. TOW HAUL
The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of the gear
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW
HAUL button is pushed once. (See page 294 for more information.)
information.)
12. OD/OFF – IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the OD/OFF button is located at the end of
the gear shift lever. This light will illuminate when the
TOW HAUL OD/OFF button is pushed twice. (See page
294 for more information.)
13. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the cooling system is operat-
ing satisfactorily. The gauge needle will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or when towing a
trailer. If the needle rises to the “245°F” mark, stop the
vehicle, shift into N (Neutral), and increase the engine
idle speed for 2 to 3 minutes. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, shut your engine OFF and
allow it to cool. Seek authorized service immediately. See
Cooling System information in the section on “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle.”
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en-
gine running as you would not be able to react to the
temperature indicator if the engine overheats.
NOTE: Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1000 rpm at elevated coolant temperatures to improve
engine cooling.
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound.
14. Security Light
The light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will
flash at a slower rate after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about two seconds when the
ignition is first turned ON.
15. Transmission Range Indicator (Automatic
Transmissions Only)
When the gear selector lever is moved on vehicles with
the 48RE transmission, this indicator shows the auto-
matic transmission gear range selected (P RND21).
When the gear selector lever is moved on vehicles with
the 68RFE transmission, this indicator shows the auto-
matic transmission gear range selected (P R N D). Ve-
hicles equipped with Auto-6/Electronic Range Select
(ERS) will display the selection of the desired top gear, in
the position next to the D (Drive).
16. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
If the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
4
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer,
press the Odometer/Trip Odometer Button. To reset the
Trip Odometer, press and hold the button while in trip
mode, until the Trip Odometer resets.
Also the cluster will display, replacing the odometer,
vehicle warning messages such as: door, and No-fuse.
NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This
indicates the total number of hours the engine has been
running. To display the engine hours perform the follow-
ing: Place the ignition in RUN, but do not start the
engine. With the odometer value displayed, hold the trip
button down for a period of 6 seconds. The odometer will
change to trip value first, then it will display the engine
hour value. The engine hours will be displayed for a
period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned off or the
engine is started.
17. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
18. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
which monitors the emissions and engine control
system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5
seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the
bulb does not come on during starting, have the condi-
tion investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
19. Brake System Warning Light
This light illuminates when the ignition key is turned to
the ON position and remains on for a few seconds. If the
light stays on longer, it may be an indication that the
parking brake has not been released. This light will
illuminate if the brake fluid is low, especially when
braking or accelerating hard. This light will illuminate if
the ABS indicator light has a malfunction. This light will
flash if the engine is running and the parking brake is on.
If the light remains on when the parking brake is
released, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction. In this case, the light will remain on until
the cause is corrected.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary
and continued operation of the vehicle in this condition is
dangerous.
Acceleration which causes the rear wheels to slip for a
period of time may result in the red brake light illumi-
nating and a brake switch code being set on ABS
equipped vehicles. Depressing the brake pedal should
extinguish the red brake light.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
4
20. ABS Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
which is described elsewhere in this manual. This
light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and may stay on for five seconds. If the ABS
light remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates
that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required. See your autho-
rized dealer immediately. The ABS light could also
illuminate during loss of traction and remain illuminated
until the brake pedal is pressed.
21. Cargo Light
The Cargo Lamp light will illuminate when the
Cargo Lamp is activated by pressing the Cargo
Light Button on the headlight switch.
22. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
lem is detected the light will come on while the
engine is running. If the light remains lit with
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable,
however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
23. SERV 4WD Indicator
The 4WD indicator will be illuminated whenever the
4WD mode is engaged for either the manual or electric
shift 4WD systems. The SERV 4WD indicator monitors
the electric shift 4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light
stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
24. Water In Fuel Indicator
Indicates there is water detected in the fuel
filter. Refer to the Maintenance section, Drain-
ing Fuel/Water Separator Filter, for water
drain procedure. (See page 427 for more information.)
25. Transmission Oil Temperature Warning Light
(Automatic Transmissions Only)
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque
converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive operation
(e.g. snow plowing, off- road operation). If this light
comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light
goes off.
26. Wait To Start Indicator
The Wait To Start Indicator will illuminate when
the ignition is turned to the run position and the
intake manifold temperature is below 66 degrees F.
Follow engine starting procedure for proper engine start-
ing and operating. Wait until the Wait To Start Indicator
turns OFF then start the vehicle.
NOTE: The Wait To Start Indicator may not illuminate if
the engine coolant temperature is warm enough.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
4
27. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
trip odometer reading when in trip mode.
28. Fuel Gauge
Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
ON position.
29. Low Fuel Warning Light
Glows when the pointer is between “E” and 1/8
indication mark (approximately 15% of tank vol-
ume) on the fuel gauge. When the fuel gauge
pointer is on “E” (equivalent to Distance To Empty [DTE]
= 0 on the overhead console if so equipped) there is
reserve fuel capacity, which corresponds to approxi-
mately 8% of tank volume. This reserve capacity was put
in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running
out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions
in areas where there aren’t many gas stations. (See page
145 for more information.)
Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:
•
34 gallons - 2500/3500 short box models
•
35 gallons - 2500/3500 long box models
30. CRUISE Light
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
system is turned on.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep-
ing is accurately maintained.
On the RAQ radio the time button alternates the location
of the time and frequency on the display. On the REF only
one of the two, time or frequency is displayed at a time.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately
5 seconds.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
4
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
REF Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
4
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
feature.
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
4
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Preset Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
•
On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
•
This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
4
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK posi-
tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
4
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)”
section of the Owner’s Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
RAQ Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
4
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
only).
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
4
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL-
ANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust
the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or
turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
16 Digit-Character
Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adult_Hits
Alert Alert Alert Alert
Classical Classical
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
College College
Country Country
Emergency Test Emergency Test
Foreign Language Foreign_Language
Information Information
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Oldies Oldies
Personality Personality
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious Music Religious_Music
Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft_Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top_40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into push-button memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
4
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12
FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
4
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD aftera2minutetimeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted
within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be dis-
played.
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons1-6(CDMODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
4
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
4
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD aftera2minutetimeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
4
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons1-6(CDMode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD
(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE
RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and
WMA CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Cassette, Satellite, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
RAK Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
4
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left
side to seek down. The radio will remained tuned to the
new station until you make another selection. Holding
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
until you release it.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite
scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continu-
ing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second
time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast (if available) from an FM station (FM
mode only).
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance, and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5-second time
out, the PTY icon will turn off. Turning the tune knob
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
4
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-
cast PTY information.
Turn the tune knob to select the following format types:
Program Type
16 Digit-Character
Display
No program type or
undefined
None
News News
Information Information
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Rock Rock
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
Adult Hits Adult_Hits
Soft Rock Soft_Rock
Top 40 Top_40
Country Country
Oldies Oldies
Soft Soft
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Jazz Jazz
Classical Classical
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B
Foreign Language Foreign_Language
Religious Music Religious_Music
Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Personality Personality
Public Public
College College
Unassigned
Weather Weather
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
NOTE: If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,
simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a
“PTY seek”.
Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
left and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
4
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
Tape Eject
Press this button and the cassette will disen-
gage and eject from the radio.
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press Preset 6. The lighted arrow in the
display window will show the new direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch is turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press
Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the
display will go off when the Dolby System is off.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories Licensing Corporation.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks
and WMA.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
4
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
NOTE: MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders
only.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
4
Buttons1-6(CDMODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R, and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
4
Playback of MP3 and WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may
be affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 and
WMA Audio Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
file. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the
beginning of the file. Pressing the button within the first
ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA
Play)
LOAD/EJT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the
disc is loading.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the file or MP3 and WMA selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
4
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons1-6(CDMode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Phone” in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.”
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina-
tions and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
REC Setting the Clock
GPS Clock
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
REC Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
4
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
1. At the Main Menu screen, highlight “Clock Setup”
and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the
TIME button on the unit’s faceplate. The Clock Setup
screen appears.
2. To show the GPS clock, select “Displayed Clock: GPS
Clock” and press ENTER.
3. To adjust the time zone, Select “Time Zone” and press
ENTER. Select the appropriate time zone and press
ENTER.
4. To turn daylight savings on or off, select “Daylight
Savings” and press ENTER. Select “On” or “Off” and
press ENTER.
5. Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode. Press
ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or
NAV then your changes will not be saved.
User Defined Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
choosing the “User Defined Clock” option.
1. At the Clock Setup screen highlight “Displayed
Clock: User Defined Clock”.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. To increase the clock by hours, make sure “HR +” is
highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another hour. You will see on the
“User Defined Time” display the number of hours you
have increased the clock by.
3. To decrease the clock by one hour, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-” sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour.
4. To increase the clock by minutes, make sure “MIN +”
is highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another minute.
5. To decrease the clock by minutes, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-“ sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute.
6. Select “DONE” to exit from the clock setting mode.
Press ENTER to save your changes. If you press CAN-
CEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
4
Audio Clock Display
Select this option to change the size of the clock on the
audio screens.
1. When you are at an audio screen, quickly press the
TIME button on the navigation faceplate.
2. In this example the large clock appears on the screen.
3. To switch the clock to the small clock, quickly press
TIME again.
4. To toggle back to the large clock, simply press TIME.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE
XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) con-
sists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two head-
sets. The system is located in the headliner behind the
front row seat. Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for
detailed operating instructions.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of
SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory-
installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will
contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm
subscription information, including the set up of your
on-line listening account at no additional charge. For
further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-
7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com.
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
4
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access with REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will display. Press the
SEEK UP button to display the next four digits. Continue
to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID
digits display. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits display. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access with RAQ and RAK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will display. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode
when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned
OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was
pushed.
ESN/SID Access with REC Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the
radio off, press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta-
neously until the 12 digits of the ESN/SID appear on the
screen.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK
Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information, such as song
title and artist, press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
4
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button — If
Equipped
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button, while
performing a music type scan, will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception on vehicles available with
a luggage rack, do not place items on the roof around the
rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the
line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased perfor-
mance. Larger luggage items should be placed as far
forward as possible. Do not place items directly on or
above the antenna.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume. The center button of the
right hand control will allow you to change the mode.
Remote Sound System Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
4
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the left side switch will SEEK up for
the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the
switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
Tape Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-
ished.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flatly to the cassette.
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
4
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged, oversized, or have theft
protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor-
mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio
volume be turned down or off during cellular phone
operation.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The controls for the heating and ventilation system in this
vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs. These comfort
controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Heater Only — If Equipped
The mode control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
Climate Control Location
Manual Heating Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
4
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level)
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains smoke or
odors. This feature allows for recircu-
lation of interior air only. Air flows
through the panel outlets in this mode.
Air flows through the panel only or
through both the panel and floor vents
depending on the selected mode (panel vs bi-level).
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the blower control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left posi-
tion.
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center of the
control panel controls the temperature
of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating the
knob. The coldest temperature setting
is to the extreme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the extreme
right (red region) of the rotation.
Air Conditioning and Heating — If Equipped
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan
control at any speed and press the snowflake
button located at the right of the control panel.
Conditioned air will be directed through the
outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the
Air Conditioning And Heating
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
4
snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on.
Press the button a second time to turn the air condition-
ing off.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
The mode control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level)
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains smoke, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
desired. This feature allows for recir-
culation of interior air only. Air flows
through the panel only or through
both the panel and floor vents depend-
ing on the selected mode (panel vs bi-level).
NOTE: Selecting a “Recirculation Mode” mode does not
necessarily consume more fuel than normal A/C mode.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Floor
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets, and the air conditioning
may be on.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel, and the air
conditioning may be on.
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the blower control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left posi-
tion.
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center of the
control panel controls the temperature
of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating the
knob. The coldest temperature setting
is to the extreme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the extreme
right (red region) of the rotation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
4
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use. To
remove frost from the side windows, it is best to use the
full defrost mode.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
Air Conditioning with Dual Zone Temperature
Control — If Equipped
With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the tem-
perature of air coming from the outlets on their side of
the vehicle.
Dual Zone Control Head
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning and Heating Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control at any
speed and press the snowflake button located on the
control panel. Conditioned air will be directed through
the outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the
snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on.
Press the button a second time to turn the air condition-
ing off.
A/C Pushbutton
With the fan control in the ON posi-
tion, pushing the A/C button turns on
the air conditioning compressor. An
indicator light on the button shows
that the Air Conditioning compressor
is on. Conditioned air is now directed
through the mode outlets selected.
Pushing the button a second time turns the compressor
OFF.
Recirculation Pushbutton
Pushing the Recirculation button al-
lows interior air to recirculate continu-
ously in any position except defrost
and defrost/floor mode for rapid cool
down of the interior. See “Fast
Cooldown” later in this section.
Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
4
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots and give an even blend of both
modes.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to
direct the airflow.
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel and those located on the floor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Heat
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if
the A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies
the air to help dry the windshield.
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the blower control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left posi-
tion.
Dual Zone Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. This is accomplished
by having separate temperature control slides for both
the driver and front passenger. The blue area of the scale
indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
Dual Zone Temperature Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
4
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
Rear Air Duct—Mega Cab Only
The rear seat will receive air flow in all modes except for
Defrost.
The rear air duct is designed to be pointed up when in
A/C mode, and pointed down in Heat mode.
Mega Cab Rear Air Duct
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, turn the blower fan rotary knob to
the extreme right position, turn the mode control to the
panel fresh position, press the snowflake button to turn
on the air conditioning, and drive with the windows
open for the first few minutes. Once the hot air has been
expelled, close the windows and press the Recirculation
push-button. When a comfortable condition has been
reached, choose a mode position and adjust the tempera-
ture control slide and blower speed as necessary to
maintain comfort. For high humidity conditions it may
be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to
maintain comfort.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher blower
speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
4
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended. Refer to Recommended
Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, addi-
tional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to
increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When
stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into
NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast
idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.
NOTE: On models equipped with Diesel engines, the
idle speed will automatically increase to 1000 rpm at
elevated coolant temperatures to improve engine cooling.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures – Diesel Engines .........275
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped ........275
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped ......276
▫ Normal Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold
Airtemperature Above 66°F (19°C) .........276
▫ Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air
Temperature Below 66°F (19°C) ...........277
▫ Starting Fluids .......................281
䡵 Normal Operation (Diesel Engine) ...........281
▫ Cold Weather Precautions ...............282
▫ Engine Idling — In Cold Weather ..........286
▫ Stopping The Engine ...................287
▫ Engine Speed Control ..................288
▫ Operating Precautions ..................288
▫ Cooling System Tips —
Automatic Transmission ................288
䡵 Diesel Exhaust Brake (Engine Braking) –
If Equipped ...........................290
5
䡵 Transmission Shifting ....................291
▫ Automatic Transmission With Overdrive
(68RFE) — If Equipped .................291
▫ Automatic Transmission With Overdrive
(48RE) — If Equipped ..................297
䡵 Manual Transmission ....................303
▫ Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds ........304
▫ Downshifting ........................305
䡵 Four-Wheel- Drive Operation — If Equipped . . . 306
▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions ................306
▫ Shifting Procedure - Manually Shifted
Transfer Case ........................308
▫ Transfer Case Reminder Light ............309
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions–If Equipped .......310
▫ Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case ........................314
䡵 Limited-Slip Differential — If Equipped .......317
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............318
䡵 Driving Off-Road .......................319
䡵 Parking Brake .........................320
䡵 Brake System ..........................321
▫ Brake Noise .........................322
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System ........322
䡵 Power Steering ........................324
䡵 Tire Safety Information ...................325
▫ Tire Markings ........................325
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ..........329
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........330
䡵 Tires — General Information ...............334
▫ Tire Pressure .........................334
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................335
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ......................337
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped .........338
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped .........338
▫ TireSpinning ........................339
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................340
▫ LifeOfTire .........................340
▫ Replacement Tires .....................341
▫ Alignment And Balance .................342
䡵 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information — If
Equipped ............................343
䡵 Tire Chains ...........................343
䡵 Snow Tires ...........................345
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ............345
▫ Dual Rear Wheels .....................347
䡵 Engine Runaway .......................348
䡵 Fuel Requirements ......................348
▫ Fuel Requirements (5.9L Diesel Engine) ......348
▫ Fuel Requirements (6.7L Diesel Engines) .....350
䡵 Adding Fuel (Diesel Engines) ..............352
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............352
▫ Bulk Fuel Storage .....................353
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
5
䡵 Vehicle Loading ........................355
▫ Certification Label .....................355
䡵 TrailerTowing .........................358
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............358
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............362
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) .................363
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............363
▫ Towing Requirements ..................364
▫ TowingTips .........................370
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ......371
䡵 Snowplow ............................373
▫ Before Plowing .......................374
▫ Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability . . 374
▫ Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached ...........................375
▫ Methods For Removing Snow ............375
▫ Operating Tips .......................375
▫ General Maintenance ...................376
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) .................377
▫ Recreational Towing –
2 Wheel Drive Models ..................377
▫ Recreational Towing –
4 Wheel Drive Models ..................377
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES – DIESEL ENGINES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
The starter should not be operated for more than 15-
second intervals. Waiting a few minutes between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep
in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently
moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the
accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in
the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and
vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever
in NEUTRAL and depress the clutch pedal to the floor
before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with
a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start
unless the clutch is fully depressed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
5
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
The Cummins Diesel engine is equipped with several
features designed to assist cold weather starting and
operation:
•
The engine block heater is a resistance heater installed
in the water jacket of the engine just above and behind
the oil filter. It requires a 110–115 volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
NOTE: The engine block heater cord is a factory in-
stalled option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater
cords are available from your authorized Mopar威 dealer.
•
A 12–volt heater built into the fuel filter housing aids
in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a built-in
thermostat.
•
A heated intake air system both improves engine
starting and reduces the amount of white smoke
generated by a warming engine.
Normal Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold
AirTemperature Above 66°F (19°C)
Observe the Instrument Panel Cluster lights when start-
ing the engine.
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into PARK for an automatic transmission. Fully
depress and hold the clutch and shift into NEUTRAL for
a manual transmission. Models with manual transmis-
sion are equipped with a clutch interlocking cranking
system. The clutch must be fully depressed to start the
vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position and look at
the instrument panel cluster lamps.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If WATER IN FUEL indicator light remains on DO
NOT START engine before you drain water from the
fuel filter to avoid engine damage. See Section 7 —
Maintaining Your Vehicle, for water drain
procedures.
4. Turn the ignition key to START and crank the engine.
Do not press the accelerator during starting.
CAUTION!
Do not crank engine for more than 15 seconds at a
time as starter motor damage may result. Turn key to
OFF and wait at least two minutes before trying
again.
5. When the engine starts, release the key.
6. Check to see that there is oil pressure.
7. Release the parking brake.
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air
Temperature Below 66°F (19°C)
NOTE: The temperature displayed on the overhead
console (if equipped) does not necessarily reflect the
engine manifold air temperature. When certain engine
temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C) the lamp will remain
on indicating the intake manifold heater system is active.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
5
Follow the steps in the Normal Starting Procedure ex-
cept:
CAUTION!
Do not crank engine for more than 15 seconds at a
time or starter motor damage may result. Turn key to
OFF and wait at least 2 minutes for starter to cool
before repeating start procedure.
•
The WAIT TO START light will remain on for a period
of time (length of time depends on engine tempera-
ture).
•
After the WAIT TO START light goes off, turn the
ignition key to START. Do not press the accelerator
during starting.
•
After engine start-up, check to see that there is oil
pressure.
•
Allow the engine to idle about three minutes until
the manifold heaters have completed the post-heat
cycle.
•
Release the parking brake and drive.
NOTE: Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1000 rpm at low coolant temperatures to improve engine
warm-up.
NOTE: If the engine stalls or if the ignition switch is left
On for more than 2 minutes after the WAIT TO START
light goes out, reset the grid heaters by turning the
ignition switch to Off for at least 5 seconds and then back
On. Repeat steps 3 through 7 of the normal starting
procedure.
For Extremely Cold Weather Starting — Engine
Manifold Air Temperature Below 0°F (- 18°C)
In extremely cold weather below 0°F (- 18°C) it may be
beneficial to cycle the manifold heaters twice before
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
attempting to start the engine. This can be accomplished
by turning the ignition OFF for at least 5 seconds and
then back ON after the WAIT TO START light has gone
off, but before the engine is started. However, repeated
cycling of the manifold heaters will result in damage to
the heater elements or reduced battery voltage.
NOTE: If multiple pre-heat cycles are used before
starting, additional engine run time may be required to
maintain battery state of charge at a satisfactory level.
•
If the engine stalls after the initial start, the ignition
must be turned to the OFF position for at least 5
seconds and then to the ON position to recycle the
manifold heaters.
NOTE: Excessive white smoke and poor engine perfor-
mance will result if manifold heaters are not recycled.
•
Heat generated by the manifold heaters dissipates
rapidly in a cold engine. If more than two minutes
pass between the time the WAIT TO START light goes
OFF and the engine is started, recycle the manifold
heaters by turning the ignition OFF for at least 5
seconds and then back ON.
•
If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed exceeds 19
mph (31 km) before the manifold heater post-heat
(after start) cycle is complete, the manifold heaters will
shut off.
•
If the engine is started before the WAIT TO START
light turns off, the preheat cycle will turn off.
•
If the engine is cranked for more than 10 seconds, the
post-heat cycle will turn off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
5
NOTE: Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1000 rpm at low coolant temperatures to improve engine
warm-up.
NOTE: When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel or the fuel gels at low temperatures, air is pulled into
the fuel system.
You may try priming as described below.
1. Add a substantial quantity of fuel to the tank (5 to 10
gallons) or eliminate the gelled fuel condition.
2. Crank the engine for 1 to 2 seconds. If the engine does
not start, then release the key or starter button back to the
RUN position (do not turn the key back to the OFF
position). The electric fuel transfer pump will continue to
run and purge air from the system for about 20 seconds.
After 20 seconds, attempt to start the engine again.
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting Procedure.
4. Repeat the procedure if the engine does not start.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system when
cranking the engine or with the engine running.
Engine operation causes high fuel pressure. High
pressure fuel spray can cause serious injury or death.
NOTE: The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Starting Fluids
WARNING!
STARTING FLUIDS or flammable liquids are
NEVER TO BE USED in the Cummins Diesel (see
Warning label). Never pour diesel fuel, flammable
liquid, starting fluids (ether) into the air cleaner
canister, air intake piping, or turbocharger inlet in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a
flash fire and explosion causing serious personal
injury and engine damage.
The engine is equipped with an automatic electric air
preheating system. If the instructions in this manual are
followed, the engine should start in all conditions.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
NORMAL OPERATION (DIESEL ENGINE)
Observe the following when the engine is operating.
•
All message center lights are off.
•
Check Engine Lamp is off.
•
Engine Oil Pressure is above 10 psi (69 kPa) at idle.
•
Low Oil Pressure light is off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
5
•
Voltmeter Operation:
•
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling operation
is caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake mani-
fold heater system. The number of cycles and the
length of the cycling operation is controlled by the
engine control module. Post-heat operation can run
for several minutes, and then the electrical system
and voltmeter needle will stabilize.
•
The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of
the headlamps, interior lamps, and also a noticeable
reduction in blower motor speed.
Cold Weather Precautions
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may
require special considerations. The following charts sug-
gest these options:
Fuel Operating Range (5.9L Diesel Engine)
*No. 1 diesel fuel should only be used where extended
arctic conditions (-10°F/-23°C) exist.
NOTE:
•
Use of Climatized Diesel Fuel or Number 1 Diesel Fuel
results in a noticeable decrease in fuel economy.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Climatized Diesel Fuel is a blend of Number 2 and
Number 1 Diesel Fuels which reduces the temperature
at which wax crystals form in fuel.
NOTE: Refer to Fuel Requirements in this section for
further details on fuel recommendations.
Fuel Operating Range (6.7L Diesel Engine)
NOTE: Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels” ONLY.
*No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only be used
where extended arctic conditions (-10°F/-23°C) exist.
NOTE:
•
Use of Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel or
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel results in a
noticeable decrease in fuel economy.
•
Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is a blend of
Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur and Number 1 Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuels which reduces the temperature at
which wax crystals form in fuel.
NOTE: The engine requires the use of “Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel”. Use of incorrect fuel could result in
engine and exhaust system damage. Refer to Fuel Re-
quirements in this section for further details on fuel
recommendations.
Engine Block Heater
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the heater
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
5
cord to a ground–fault interrupter protected 110–115 volt
AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire exten-
sion cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood to
the right side and can be located just behind the grille
near the headlamp.
NOTE: The engine block heater cord is a factory in-
stalled option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater
cords are available from your authorized Mopar威 dealer.
The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to
have an adequate warming effect on the coolant.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110–115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
NOTE: The block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
Block Heater Usage
A. Temperatures below 0°F (-18°C)
•
Block Heater Required for 15W-40
•
Block Heater Recommended for 5W-40
B. Temperatures below - 20°F (-29°C)
•
Block Heater Required for 5W-40
Winter Front Usage
If a winter front or cold weather cover is to be used, a
percentage of the total grille opening area must be left
uncovered to provide sufficient air flow to the charge air
cooler and automatic transmission oil cooler. The per-
centage of opening must be increased with the increasing
ambient air temperature and/or engine load. If the
cooling fan can be heard cycling frequently, increase the
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
size of the opening in the winter front. A suitable cold
weather cover is available from your Mopar威 dealer.
Battery Blanket Usage
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the battery
temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°). For the same de-
crease in temperature, the engine requires twice as much
power to crank at the same RPM. The use of 120 VAC
powered battery blankets will greatly increase starting
capability at low temperatures. Suitable battery blankets
are available from your authorized Mopar威 dealer.
Arctic Operation
Where there are no provisions to keep the engine warm
when it is operating in ambient temperatures consistently
below (-10°F/-23°C), use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil and
fuel that meets the requirements in Section 7, “Mainte-
nance Procedures,” Engine Oil Selection.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold.
When starting a cold engine, bring the engine up to
operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to
stabilize as the engine warms up.
NOTE: High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine
can result in excessive white smoke and poor engine
performance. No-load engine speeds should be kept
under 1,200 rpm during the warm-up period, especially
in cold ambient temperature conditions.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the engine
at moderate speeds for 5 minutes before full loads are
applied.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
5
Engine Idling — In Cold Weather
Avoid prolonged idling in ambient temperatures below
0°F. Long periods of idling may be harmful to your
engine because combustion chamber temperatures can
drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely.
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to
form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the
unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil
and causing rapid wear to the engine.
NOTE: An optional driver-controlled high idle speed is
available on automatic transmission equipped vehicles
with speed control. This feature allows the driver to
select an elevated idle speed between 1100 and 1500
rpms. Your dealer can enable this feature.
NOTE:
•
If ambient temperatures are low and the coolant
temperature is below 200°F (93°C), the engine idle
speed will slowly increase to 1000 RPM after 2 minutes
of idle, if the following conditions are met:
•
foot is off brake pedal and throttle pedal
•
automatic transmission is in Park (P)
•
vehicle speed is zero
•
Applying the throttle will cancel fast idle
•
If the engine is equipped with an exhaust brake,
operating the exhaust brake at idle will greatly im-
prove warm up rate and will help keep the engine
close to operating temperature during extended idle.
CAUTION!
Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not recom-
mended and could lead to engine damage
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
Stopping The Engine
Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown.
After full load operation, idle the engine 3 to 5 minutes
before shutting it down. This idle period will allow the
lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from
the combustion chamber, bearings, internal components,
and turbocharger. This is especially important for turbo-
charged, charge air cooled engines.
NOTE: During engine shutdown on vehicles equipped
with manual transmissions, it is normal for the diesel
engine to resonate heavily for a moment during engine
shut off. When the engine is connected to a manual
transmission, this resonance causes load gear rattle from
the transmission. This is commonly referred to as “shut
down rattle”. The manufacturer recommends performing
engine shut down with the clutch pedal pushed to the
floor (clutch disengaged). When engine shut down is
performed in this manner the rattle is reduced (not
eliminated).
Driving
Condition
Load
Turbo-
charger
Temperature
Idle Time
(min.) Be-
fore Engine
Shutdown
Stop and
Go
Empty Cool Less than
One
Stop and
Go
Medium One
Highway
Speeds
Medium Warm Two
City Traffic Maximum
GCWR
Three
Highway
Speeds
Maximum
GCWR
Four
Uphill
Grade
Maximum
GCWR
Hot Five
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
5
Engine Speed Control
CAUTION!
Prevent overspeeding the engine going down hill.
When descending steep grades, use a combination of
gears and service brakes to control vehicle/engine
speed. Overspeed can cause severe engine damage.
Operating Precautions
Avoid Overheating The Engine
The temperature of the coolant (a mixture of 50%
ethylene-glycol and 50% water) must not exceed the
normal range of the temperature gauge (240°F/116°C)
with a 16 psi (110 kPa) radiator cap.
Usually the coolant temperature indicated during opera-
tion will be to the left of center in the normal range of the
gauge.
Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation
Continual operation at low coolant temperature below
the normal range on the gauge (140°F/60°C) can be
harmful to the engine. Low coolant temperature can
cause incomplete combustion which allows carbon and
varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles.
Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting
the lubricating oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
Cooling System Tips — Automatic Transmission
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating in high ambient temperature conditions, take the
following actions:
•
City Driving —
when stopped, put transmission in neutral and increase
engine idle speed.
•
Highway Driving —
reduce your speed.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Up Steep Hills —
select a lower transmission gear, but try and keep the
torque converter locked.
•
Air Conditioning —
turn it off temporarily.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the
minimum oil pressures required are:
Idle 700 to 800 RPM ...............10psi(69kPa)
Full speed and load ..............30psi(207 kPa)
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, shut
the engine off immediately. Failure to do so could
result in immediate and severe engine damage.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed Parts
Practically all failures give some warning before the parts
fail. Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds,
and visual evidence that the engine requires service.
Some important clues are:
•
engine misfiring or vibrating severely
•
sudden loss of power
•
unusual engine noises
•
fuel, oil or coolant leaks
•
sudden change, outside the normal operating range, in
the engine operating temperature
•
excessive smoke
•
oil pressure drop
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
5
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE (ENGINE BRAKING) –
IF EQUIPPED
The Exhaust Brake feature is enabled and disabled by
pressing the exhaust brake switch located on the Instru-
ment Panel.
NOTE: For optimum braking power it is recommended
to use the Exhaust Brake while in Tow/Haul Mode.
The purpose of the exhaust brake (engine braking) fea-
ture is to supply negative (braking) torque to the engine.
Typically, the engine braking is used for, but not limited
to, vehicle towing applications where vehicle braking can
be achieved by the internal engine power, thereby spar-
ing the mechanical brakes of the vehicle.
Benefits of the exhaust brake are:
•
vehicle driving control
•
reduced brake fade
•
longer brake life
•
faster cab warm-up.
Exhaust Brake Switch
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRANSMISSION SHIFTING
Automatic Transmission with Overdrive (68RFE)
— If Equipped
The gear shift selector display, located in the instrument
panel cluster, indicates the transmission gear range (the
selector is illuminated for night driving). The selector
lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column.
You must depress the brake pedal, to pull the selector
lever out of park (P) position (Brake Interlock System). To
drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the
desired drive position. Pull the selector lever toward you
when shifting into Reverse, or Park, or when shifting out
of Park.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or
Neutral position into another gear range.
“P” Park
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use Park while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range. Always apply parking brake first, then place the
selector in Park position. On 4-wheel drive vehicles be
sure that the transfer case is in a drive position!
WARNING!
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to
move the gearshift lever back and forth without first
pulling it toward you after you have set it in P. Make
sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
5
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on
the brake pedal.
“R” Reverse
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
“N” Neutral
Shift to Neutral when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. The engine may
be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
“D” Drive
Drive range provides underdrive 1st, 2nd and 3rd gears,
direct 4th gear and overdrive 5th and 6th gears. The shift
into overdrive 5th and 6th gear occurs only after the
transmission has completed the shift into 4th gear. No
other movement of the shift mechanism is required to
complete the 4–5 or 5–6 gear shifts.
The 4th and 5th gear upshifts occurs automatically unless
the Tow/Haul mode is enabled.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Upshifts into both overdrive gears, 5th and 6th, will be
delayed when the transmission fluid temperature is
below 40° F (4.5° C) or above 240° F (115.5° C).
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle in 2nd or 1st First gear in high ambients as torque
converter slip can impose significant additional heat load
on the cooling system.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
tronically controlled 5th and 6th (Overdrive). The trans-
mission will automatically shift from Drive to Overdrive
if the following conditions are present:
•
the transmission selector is in Drive;
•
the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
perature;
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
•
the “TOW HAUL” switch has not been activated;
•
transmission has reached normal operating tempera-
ture.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
5
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light
may illuminate. After cool down, the transmission will
resume normal operation.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive
if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use “TOW HAUL”
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the “TOW HAUL button once to select TOW
HAUL. In TOW HAUL mode, 4th to 5th gear upshifts are
1 — Tow/Haul Switch
2 — AUTO-6 (ERS) Switch
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
delayed. Shifts into 5th and 6th gear are still allowed
under steady cruise conditions. Closed throttle down-
shifts (for improved engine braking) may occur during
steady braking maneuvers. Pressing the switch a second
time restores normal operation. Normal operation is
always the default at engine start-up.
The “TOW HAUL” light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated. If
the “TOW HAUL” modes are desired, the button must be
pressed each time the engine is started.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Auto–6 Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows you to move the switch down (-) or up (+) when
the shifter is in the D (Drive) position, allowing the
selection of the desired top gear. For example, if the
driver shifts the transmission into 3rd gear, the transmis-
sion will never shift above 3rd gear, but can shift down to
2nd or 1st gear, when needed.
Switching from ERS to D-Mode can be done at any
vehicle speed. To switch from “Drive” mode to “ERS”
mode, press the switch down (-) once. The selected gear
will be maintained as the top gear. To disable ERS, simply
press and hold the switch up (+) until “D” is displayed in
the instrument cluster odometer.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid.
Screen Display 123456D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
5
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
switch down (-). The transmission will shift to the range
from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
high gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during
acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second
gear, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button, when the transmis-
sion is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of overdrive.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
any other gear position.
Out of Park Sense Alarm — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with a Diesel Engine and a Automatic
Transmission may be equipped with an Alarm that warns
the customer, upon exiting the vehicle, that the transmis-
sion is not in the Park position. This feature will only be
functional under following conditions:
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
engine running
•
foot off the brake pedal
•
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
•
driver’s door is open.
When this feature is triggered the horn will sound, the
high beams and turn signal lamps will flash, and the
PRNDL position will flash. This will continue until one of
the following conditions is met:
•
engine is turned off
•
transmission is in Park
•
driver’s seat belt is buckled
•
brakes applied.
The alarm will continue for 3 minutes if the driver’s door
is closed but none of the other conditions listed above are
met.
Automatic Transmission with Overdrive (48RE) —
If Equipped
The gear shift selector display, located in the instrument
panel cluster, indicates the transmission gear range (the
selector is illuminated for night driving). The selector
lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column.
You must depress the brake pedal, to pull the selector
lever out of park (P) position (Brake Interlock System). To
drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the
desired drive position. Pull the selector lever toward you
when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or
when shifting out of Park.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or
Neutral position into another gear range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
5
“P” Park
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use Park while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range. Always apply parking brake first, then place the
selector in Park position. On 4-wheel drive vehicles be
sure that the transfer case is in a drive position!
WARNING!
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to
move the gearshift lever back and forth without first
pulling it toward you after you have set it in P. Make
sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on
the brake pedal.
“R” Reverse
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
“N” Neutral
Shift to Neutral when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. The engine may
be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
“D” Drive
This position provides all forward gears, including 3rd
gear direct and 4th or 5th (if equipped) gear overdrive
(see Overdrive Operation). Use this range for most city
and highway driving.
“2” Second
Use this position for driving slowly in heavy city traffic
or on mountain roads where more precise speed control
is desirable. Use it also when climbing long grades, and
for engine braking when descending moderately steep
grades. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in this range.
“1” First
Use this position for driving up very steep hills and for
engine braking at low speeds 20 mph (32 km/h) or less
when going downhill. To prevent excessive engine speed,
do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle in “2” Second or “1” First gear selections in high
ambients as torque converter slip can impose significant
additional heat load on the cooling system.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
5
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
tronically controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped) speed
(Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift
from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are
present:
•
the transmission selector is in Drive;
•
the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
perature;
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
•
the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” switch has not been
activated;
•
transmission has reached normal operating tempera-
ture.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light
may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out
of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cooldown, the transmission will resume normal opera-
tion.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive
if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
When To Use “TOW HAUL” and “O/D OFF”
Modes
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button once to
select TOW HAUL. This will improve performance and
reduce the potential for transmission overheating or
failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in
“TOW HAUL” mode, 5th gear (if equipped) is disabled
and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are modified. Shifts into
Overdrive (4th gear) are allowed during steady cruise
(for improved fuel economy) and automatic closed-
throttle downshifts to 3rd gear (for improved braking)
will occur during steady braking. Pressing the “TOW
HAUL O/D OFF” button a second time to select O/D
OFF will disable 4th and 5th gear completely, which
should eliminate any excessive transmission shifting.
The “TOW HAUL” or “O/D OFF” light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has
been activated. Pressing the switch a third time restores
normal operation. If the “TOW HAUL” or “O/D OFF”
modes are desired, the button must be pressed each time
the engine is started.
Tow Haul O/D Off Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
5
When To Lock Out Overdrive
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent 4–3–4 transmission shifting
occurs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button. This will im-
prove performance and reduce the potential for transmis-
sion overheating or failure due to excessive shifting.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
high gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during
acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second
gear, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button, when the transmis-
sion is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of overdrive.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
any other gear position.
Out of Park Sense Alarm
Vehicles with a Diesel Engine and an Automatic Trans-
mission are equipped with an Alarm that warns the
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
customer, upon exiting the vehicle, that the transmission
is not in the Park position. This feature will only be
functional under following conditions:
•
engine running
•
foot off the brake pedal
•
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
•
driver’s door is open.
When this feature is triggered the horn will sound, the
high beams and turn signal lamps will flash. This will
continue until one of the following conditions is met:
•
engine is turned off
•
transmission is in Park
•
driver’s door is closed
•
driver’s seat belt is buckled
•
brakes applied.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
Truck models with manual transmission are equipped
with a clutch interlocking ignition system. The clutch
pedal must be fully depressed to start the vehicle.
Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-
tor pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
5
This transmission has a “creeper” 1st gear which should
be used to start from a standing position when carrying
a payload or towing a trailer. Damage to the clutch can
result from starting in 2nd or 3rd gear with a loaded
vehicle. An unloaded vehicle may be launched in 2nd
gear. Use each gear in numerical order – do not skip a
gear.
For most city driving you may find it easier to use only
1st through 5th gear ranges. For steady highway driving
with light accelerations, 6th gear is recommended. To
shift into 5th gear, move the shift lever to the right
beyond the spring pressure point and push it forward.
When shifting from 5th to 4th gear, pull the lever down
toward you in one motion. Do not pull the lever sharply
left as you may shift accidentally into 2nd gear and
damage the transmission.
You should use 1st gear when starting from a standing
position if under heavy load or when pulling a trailer.
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to
stop. Move the shift lever from the Neutral position
straight across and back into Reverse.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on
the clutch.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts
during cruise conditions (steady speeds) will result in
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Mode 2to3 3to4 4to5 5to6
Accel &
Cruise
15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72)
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch. For accelera-
tion at speeds less than 15 mph (25 km/h), 2nd gear is
recommended.
CAUTION!
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
which can cause valve damage.
To prevent clutch and transmission damage, your vehicle
should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those
listed in the Maximum Recommended Downshifting
Speed chart.
Maximum Recommended Downshifting Speeds
Gear
Selec-
tion
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
Maxi-
mum
Speed
10 mph
(16
km/h)
19 mph
(31
km/h)
32 mph
(51
km/h)
50 mph
(80
km/h)
68 mph
(109
km/h)
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
5
FOUR-WHEEL- DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-Wheel-Drive Dodge Ram Trucks are equipped with
either a Manually Shifted transfer case or an Electroni-
cally Shifted transfer case. See the operating instructions
for your transfer case, located within this section.
Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions
The transfer case provides 4 mode positions-2(rear)-
wheel-drive high range, 4-wheel-drive high range, neu-
tral, and 4-wheel-drive low range.
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2-wheel-
drive position (2H) for normal street and highway con-
ditions such as dry hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required the transfer case 4H
and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
simply moving the shift lever to the desired positions.
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to the driveline components.
The 4-wheel-drive light (4WD), located in the instrument
cluster, alerts the driver that the vehicle is in 4-wheel
drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked
together. This light illuminates when the transfer case is
shifted to either the 4H or 4L positions. There is no light
for the 2H or N (Neutral) positions.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Proper operation of 4-wheel-drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can
cause damage to the transfer case.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
Because 4-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold tempera-
tures.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2H
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
5
4H
4-Wheel-Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
mation.
4L
4-Wheel-Drive Low Range - Low speed 4-wheel-drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Shifting Procedure - Manually Shifted Transfer
Case
2H ⇔ 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
Manual Transfer Case Shifter
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage / disen-
gage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator
pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force
when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H or 4H ⇔ 4L
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or depress the
clutch on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case N (Neutral).
NOTE: Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift automatic
transmission to N (Neutral), hold foot on brake, and turn
engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may oc-
cur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The pre-
ferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5
km/h).
NOTE: Do not attempt to shift to or from 4L while the
transmission is in gear or clutch is engaged.
Transfer Case Reminder Light
The four-wheel-drive operating light (4WD), located in
the instrument cluster, is used to alert the driver that the
front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are
driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
5
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions–If Equipped
This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
This Electronically Shifted transfer case provides 4 mode
positions: 2 (rear) wheel drive high range, 4 wheel drive
lock range, 4 wheel drive low range, and neutral.
The Electronically Shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the 2 wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions (dry hard surfaced roads).
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position - see Shifting Procedure section for
specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD
LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in-
creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo-
nents.
Transfer Case Switch
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected
by depressing the recessed button located on the lower
left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer
case Neutral (N) position is to be used for recreational
towing only. See the Recreational Towing section for
specific procedures on shifting into and out of Neutral
(N).
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights —
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Only
Transfer case position indicator lights are located in the
instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. When you select a different trans-
fer case position, the indicator lights will do the follow-
ing:
If All Shift Conditions are Met
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
5
If One or More Shift Conditions are not Met
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
tinue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5)
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
The “SERVICE 4WD” warning light monitors the electric
shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine
start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the ⴖService 4WDⴖ light is illu-
minated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow
the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
5
4WD LOCK
4 Wheel Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
4 Wheel Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
mation.
Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift.The indicator light for the previous position
will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator
Transfer Case Switch
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift:
return the control knob back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
NOTE: If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current position indica-
tor light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator
light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
2WD⇔ 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4HI can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning
the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition
key must be in the ON position with the engine either
RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
key is in the accessory position.
NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels are
spinning (no traction). In this situation the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original posi-
tion indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce
speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
5
2WD or 4WD LOCK⇔ 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER
OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Procedure
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3
to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch
on manual transmissions).
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (de-
press clutch on manual transmissions).
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
then the desired position indicator light will flash con-
tinuously while the original position indicator light is
ON, until all requirements have been met.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: If your are leaving your vehicle stored for longer
than 21 days, refer to the section on “Vehicle Storage.”
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — IF EQUIPPED
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when
there is a difference between the traction characteristics
of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit per-
forms similarly to a conventional differential. On slip-
pery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better
traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
momentary application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
5
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-
tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground, since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING OFF-ROAD
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep
hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL, or
diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,
shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator
slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.
DO NOT REDUCE the tire pressures for this type of
driving.
NOTE: After off-road usage, particularly in sand or
mud, inspect the underside of the vehicle for accumu-
lated dirt at the propeller shaft, axles, U-joints, brake
rotors and calipers.
Use a hose to clean off any accumulation of dirt or mud.
Check the exhaust system and all exposed components
for any sign of damage.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud,
slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for im-
pacted material. Impacted foreign material can cause a
wheel imbalance. Removing the foreign material from
the wheels will correct the situation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
5
PARKING BRAKE
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
NOTE: The instrument cluster red brake warning light
will come on and flash to indicate that the parking brake
is applied. You must be sure that the parking brake is
fully applied before leaving the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the gear shift lever is in the PARK position. When
parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake
before placing the gear shift lever in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the selector out of PARK.
Parking Brake Release
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in Park, a manual transmission in
Reverse or First gear. Failure to do so may allow
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activa-
tion of the BRAKE warning lamp and the ABS lamp (if
equipped) during brake use.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
5
Brake Noise
During normal operation of the brake system certain
noises may be present from time to time. Occasional
⬙groan⬙ or ⬙squeal⬙ noises may occur during normal
operation of the brake system which may not be indica-
tive of a problem. These noises may be heard at any time
the brakes are applied but may be more noticeable during
the first few brake applications in the morning. Moisture,
hot or cold temperature, dust, and or other debris may
also contribute to the noise condition. Repeated or con-
tinuous noises during braking may be an indication that
the brake linings are worn and in need of replacement.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System
WARNING!
Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated elec-
tronic equipment. It may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference can
cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability.
Installation of such equipment should be performed
by qualified professionals.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
This Anti-lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver
in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking
conditions. The system operates with a separate com-
puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel
lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation. This is
normal.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the Anti-lock Brake System, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake
system and is normal.
Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be
accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indi-
cate that the system is functioning.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
5
ABS Warning Light
The Anti-lock Brake System includes an amber warning
light, located in the instrument cluster. When the light is
illuminated, the Anti-lock Brake System is not function-
ing. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
WARNING!
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short period of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and should be avoided when pos-
sible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
5
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
•
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
5
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the
TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted
on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
5
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
5
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
kg).
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
5
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause acci-
dents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire
failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that
result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You
could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the
other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended
cold tire inflation pressure.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat-
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases tire rolling
resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Tire Placard Location
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
5
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12 °F (7 °C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68 °F (20 °C) and the
outside temperature = 32 °F (0 °C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 °F (7 °C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
5
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80
km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread
life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this
manual for additional information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
5
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
5
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, result-
ing in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
Fast tire wear.
•
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
— IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
gers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class U” chains on 2500/3500 Ram Trucks, or other
traction aids that meet SAE Type “U” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,
as recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that only chains in good
condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious vehicle
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain
before further use.
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after
driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of
installation, operating speed, and conditions for usage. Always
use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac-
turer if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
5
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of Ram
4X2 trucks.
NOTE: The use of class “U” chains is permitted on the
front and rear of 4X4, 2500 Ram Trucks with LT245/
70R17E tires.
NOTE: The use of class “U” chains is permitted on the
front and rear of 4X4, 3500 Ram Trucks with Dual Rear
Wheels and LT235/80R17E tires.
NOTE: On 4X2 2500/3500 Ram Trucks, class “U” snow
chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles
equipped with LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17, and LT235/
80R17 size tires.
NOTE: On 4X4 2500/3500 Single Rear Wheel (SRW)
Ram Trucks, class “U” snow chains are permitted on the
rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with LT265/70R17.
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on 4x4 Ram trucks equipped
with P265/70R17, LT275/70R17 tires. There may not
be adequate clearance for the chains and you are
risking structural or body damage to your vehicle. Do
not use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of
2500/3500 SRW (Single Rear Wheels) equipped with
LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17 tires or 4X4 front tires of
Ram Trucks equipped with LT265/70R17tires. There
may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you
are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
5
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
NOTE: On Canadian vehicles only, if your Ram truck is
equipped with All-Season type tires on the front and
ON/OFF Road type tires mounted on the rear, do not use
a front to back rotation pattern. Instead, rotate your tires
side to side at the recommended intervals.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Dual Rear Wheels
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
CAUTION!
3500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved direc-
tion of rotation. This is to accommodate the asym-
metrical design (tread pattern) of the ON/OFF road
tire and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL) tires.
•
When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to
be remounted on the rim or installed at a different
location to maintain the correct placement of the
tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position
on the truck. For example, if the spare is used to
replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re-
mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished
inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical
tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will
maintain proper position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
5
ENGINE RUNAWAY
WARNING!
In case of engine runaway due to flammable fumes
from gasoline spills or turbocharger oil leaks being
sucked into the engine do the following to help avoid
personal injury and/or vehicle damage:
1. Shut off engine ignition switch.
2. Using a CO
2
or dry chemical type fire extin-
guisher, direct the spray from the fire extinguisher
into the grille on the passenger side so that the spray
enters the engine air intake.
The inlet for the engine air intake is located behind the
passenger side headlamp and receives air through the
grille
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Fuel Requirements (5.9L Diesel Engine)
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier.
For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting
ASTM specification D-975 will provide good perfor-
mance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20
degrees F or -7 degrees C), or is required to operate at
colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods,
use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel
fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better
protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel
filters.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions
and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel
fuel.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To
prevent fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated
water from the fuel/water separator using the fuel/
water separator drain provided. Use an approved fuel
container to catch drainage and dispose of per local and
governmental regulations. If you buy good quality fuel
and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel condition-
ers should not be required in your vehicle. If available in
your area, a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel may offer
improved cold-starting and warm-up performance.
Fuel Specifications
The Cummins Turbocharged, Charge Air Cooled, Diesel
engine has been developed to take advantage of the high
energy content and generally lower cost No. 2 diesel fuel
or No. 2 climatized diesel fuels. Experience has shown
that it also operates on No. 1 diesel fuels or other fuels
within specification.
NOTE: This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel
blends up to 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification
D-6751.
NOTE: In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper operation of your
Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
5
NOTE: DaimlerChrysler recommends the use of Ultra
Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maxi-
mum) wherever it is available. Your vehicle is also
capable of operation on Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel
(500 ppm maximum) without the risk of damage to the
emissions control system. Although labels on retail Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel station pumps may state that
the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel is prohibited
on MY 2007 and later vehicles, the United States Envi-
ronmental Protection Agency recognizes that this par-
ticular 2007 MY vehicle may be operated on either Low
or Ultra Low Sulfur Highway diesel fuel. Please note,
however, that other 2007 MY vehicles may be equipped
with different emissions control systems and may be
operated only with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel
fuel (reference www.cleandiesel.org).
NOTE: No. 1 diesel fuel should only be used where
extended arctic conditions (-10°F or -23°C) exist.
Fuel Requirements (6.7L Diesel Engines)
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in
your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15
ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum)
to avoid damage to the emissions control system. For
most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM
specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good perfor-
mance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below
20°F or -7°C), or is required to operate at colder-than-
normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized
No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50%
No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection from
fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions
and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel
fuel.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To prevent
fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from
the fuel/water separator using the fuel/water separator
drain provided. If you buy good quality fuel and follow
the cold weather advice above, fuel conditioners should
not be required in your vehicle. If available in your area,
a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel may offer improved
cold-starting and warm-up performance.
Fuel Specifications
The Cummins Turbocharged, Charge Air Cooled, Diesel
engine has been developed to take advantage of the high
energy content and generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low
Sulfur diesel fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur climatized
diesel fuels. Experience has shown that it also operates
on No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuels or other fuels
within specification.
NOTE: A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-6751 may be used with your
Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
NOTE: In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper operation of your
Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
NOTE: No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only
be used where extended arctic conditions (-10°F or -23°C)
exist.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
5
ADDING FUEL (DIESEL ENGINES)
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened.
•
Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the
vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is on a truck bed. You could be burned.
Always place fuel containers on the ground while
filling.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use
with this vehicle.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can cause
severe damage to the engine fuel system. Proper main-
tenance of the engine fuel filter and fuel tank is essential.
(See Section 7 for Maintenance Procedures).
NOTE: Climatized diesel fuel is a blend of Number 2
and Number 1 Diesel fuel which reduces the temperature
at which wax crystals form in the fuel.
Bulk Fuel Storage
If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of the
stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated with
water will promote the growth of “microbes.” These
microbes form “slime” that will clog fuel filters and lines.
Drain condensation from the supply tank and change the
line filter on a regular basis.
NOTE: When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
5
You may try priming as described below. However, if the
engine will not start, refer to the fuel priming procedure
in the Service Manual or have the vehicle towed to an
authorized Dodge dealer.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious
injury or death.
Priming if the engine has run out of fuel
1. Add a substantial quantity of fuel to the tank 5 to 10
gallons (19 to 38L).
2. Crank the engine for 1 to 2 seconds. If the engine does
not start, then release the key or starter button back to the
RUN position (do not turn the key back to the OFF
position). The electric fuel transfer pump will continue to
run and purge air from the system for about 20 seconds.
After 20 seconds, attempt to start the engine again.
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting Procedure.
4. Repeat the procedure if the engine does not start.
CAUTION!
Do not engage the starter motor for more than 15
seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between the
cranking intervals.
NOTE: The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
5
Tire Size
The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
An EXAMPLE of a loaded vehicle is shown in the
following chart. Note that neither GVWR nor GAWR
capabilities are exceeded. Overloading can cause poten-
tial safety hazards and shorten service life.
NOTE: The weights shown in this chart are not
necessarily the weights for your vehicle. Also, the
amount of load added to both the front and rear axles
can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed
both in its ⴖcurb weightⴖ condition, and in its ⴖloaded
and ready for operationⴖ condition.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
5
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
5
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axel(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over
the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects
a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.
Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
5
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000
lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to
the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000
lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package.
See your dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
ClassI-LightDuty 2,000lbs(907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Fifth Wheel/
Gooseneck
Greater than 10,000 lbs
(4540 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
•
http:// www.dodge.com/towing.
•
http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada).
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
5
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Your vehicle may require special axle lubricant.
Please refer to the fluids section of this manual.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the
transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral.
Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
5
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
5
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may includea4and7pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
4 - Pin Connector
7- Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
5
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “TOW
HAUL” or “OD/OFF” range should be selected.
NOTE: Using the “TOW HAUL” or “OD/OFF” range
while operating the vehicle under heavy operating con-
ditions will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, turn the “TOW HAUL OD/OFF” feature ON when
driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive
position 2 on more severe grades.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
−
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
−
refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-
board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or
In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main
mirror surface.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
5
NOTE: Fold the7x10inch trailer towing mirrors
rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.
Blindspot Mirror
Trailer Towing Position
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOWPLOW
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include components
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner / installer obtain and
follow the recommendations contained within the cur-
rent Dodge BODY BUILDER’S GUIDE. See your dealer,
installer or snowplow manufacture for this information.
There are unique electrical systems that must be con-
nected to properly assure operator safety and prevent
overloading vehicle systems.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in an acci-
dent. Do not expect that the airbag will perform as
described earlier in this manual
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exte-
rior lamps are not properly installed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
5
Before plowing
•
Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
level.
•
Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight-
ness.
•
Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be 1/4 to 1/2 inch above
ground in snow plowing position.
•
Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
tioning properly.
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.dodge.com or refer to the current Dodge Body
Builders Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
should not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. The snowplow prep packages are not available with
the Sport Package.
4. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)
ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Com-
pliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door
opening.
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting pas-
sengers.
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifications
at the factory without consideration for the weight of the
plow. Front end tow-in should be checked and reset if
necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow
season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip-
ment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
Over the Road Operation With Snowplow Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
and allow adequate passing clearance.
Methods For Removing Snow
Operating Tips
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator
should be familiar with the area and surface to be
cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when
plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
5
NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
with an overhead console module, the outside tempera-
ture display will show higher temperatures than the
outside ambient temperature. The higher displayed tem-
perature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the
underhood ambient temperature sensor by the snow-
plow. This is common and outside temperature display
operation will return to normal when the snowplow is
removed.
General Maintenance
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer’s instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and driv-
etrain damage, the following precautions should be ob-
served.
•
Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small
or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
4H.
•
Vehicles with 48RE transmissions should use 4L range
when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
•
Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting
the transmission.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational Towing – 2 Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing of 2 Wheel Drive models is not
allowed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground can
result in severe transmission damage.
Recreational Towing – 4 Wheel Drive Models
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these requirements can cause severe
damage to the transmission and/or transfer case.
CAUTION!
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
NOTE: Both the Manual Shift and Electronic Shift
transfer cases must be shifted into Neutral (N) for
recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be
placed in P (Park) position for recreational towing.
Manual transmissions must be left in gear (not in neutral)
for recreational towing. Refer below for the proper trans-
fer case Neutral shifting procedure for your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
5
Recreational Towing Procedure — Manual Shift
Transfer Case — If Equipped
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (NEUTRAL) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Shift automatic transmission to N (NEUTRAL), or
depress the clutch on manual transmissions.
5. Shift transfer case lever into N (NEUTRAL).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
8. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with the transmission in Drive
(D).
10. Shut OFF the engine and place the ignition key to the
unlocked OFF position.
11. Shift automatic transmission into P (PARK).
12. Apply the parking brake.
13. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if
the transmission is shifted into P (PARK) with the
transfer case in N (NEUTRAL) and the engine RUN-
NING. With the transfer case in N (NEUTRAL)
ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the
transmission into P (PARK)
Returning to Normal Operation — Manual Shift
Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shut OFF the engine.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to N (NEUTRAL), or
depress the clutch on manual transmissions.
6. Shift transfer case lever to desired position.
7. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park).
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL) po-
sition disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to
move regardless of the transmission position. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
5
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
the internal parts.
Recreational Towing Procedure — Electronic Shift
Transfer Case — If Equipped
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, but do not
start the engine.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
clutch on manual transmission.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
4 seconds.
7. After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light
comes on release Neutral (N) button.
8. Start engine.
9. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive
(D).
12. Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the
unlocked OFF position.
13. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P).
14. Apply parking brake.
15. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
16. Release parking brake.
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapses
and the shift has been completed. If any of these require-
ments (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met
prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no
longer met during the 4 second timer, then the Neutral
(N) indicator light will flash continuously until all re-
quirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is
released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
5
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case
in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the
transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is
OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P).
Returning to Normal Operation — Electronic Shift
Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, but do not
start the engine.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
clutch on manual transmission.
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
1 second.
7. After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release
the Neutral (N) button.
8. After the Neutral (N) button has been released the
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
9. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park).
NOTE: The transfer case can not be shifted into Neutral
(N) from the 4Auto (if equipped) position.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and
the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements
(with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to
depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met
during the 1 second time, then all of the mode position
indicator lights will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
despite the transmission position. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
5
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and fluid loss
will damage internal parts.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher ..................386
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ................387
▫ All Models – If Equipped ...............387
䡵 Jacking Instructions .....................388
▫ Removing The Spare Tire ................388
▫ Tire Changing Procedure ................389
䡵 Hoisting .............................398
䡵 Jump-Starting .........................399
▫ With Portable Starting Unit ..............402
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..................402
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ........403
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ................404
▫ 4-Wheel- Drive Vehicles .................404
▫ 2–Wheel- Drive Vehicles ................404
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning switch is mounted on the top of the
steering column as shown in the illustration.
To engage the Hazard Warning lights, depress the button
on the top of the steering column. When the Hazard
Warning switch is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash off and on to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning lights will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning lights
may discharge your battery.
Hazard Light Warning Switch
386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
All Models – If Equipped
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat. Lift the flap on the side of the seat for
access.
Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and
sliding the assembly from under the seat.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387
6
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving
you may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid accelera-
tion, or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with
force, resulting in serious injury.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Removing The Spare Tire
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert
the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate
and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism
tube. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise
until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable
slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Changing Procedure
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The jack is
designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only.
It is not recommended that the jack be used for service
purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
Preparations
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE
(manual transmission). On four-wheel drive vehicles,
shift the transfer case to the “4L” position.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389
6
•
Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block
the left rear wheel.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. For 2500/3500 4x2 series trucks, when changing a
front wheel, place the bottle jack under the frame rail
behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far forward as
possible on the straight part of the frame.
For 2500/3500 4x4 series trucks, when changing the front
wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and
connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the
jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the
drive tubes extending to the front. Connect the jack tube
extension and wheel wrench.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle between the
spring and the shock absorber with the drive tubes
extending to the rear. Connect the jack tube extension and
wheel wrench.
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
6
NOTE: If the jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumb wheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the
jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.
4X2 Jacking
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel on 2500/3500 single rear
wheel (SRW) models. On 3500 dual rear wheel models
(DRW) the lug nuts are a two piece assembly with a flat
face. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the nuts until the
vehicle has been lowered.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393
6
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts
using a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 135 ft.
lbs. (183 N·m) torque for 2500/3500 single rear wheel
(SRW) models and 145 ft. lbs. (197 N·m) for 3500 dual rear
wheel models. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer
or at a service station.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
7. Install wheel center cap and remove wheel blocks. Do
not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the
spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the jack
will not lower by turning the dial (thumb wheel) by
hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in
order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and
tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
For 2500/3500 single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the
blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off.
Insert the blade end into the pryoff notch and carefully
pop off the hub cap with a back and forth motion.
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the
rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on the
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel
skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap on 3500
models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry
the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.
CAUTION!
Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap.
Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub
cap, damage to the hub cap finish may occur.
CAUTION!
The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry
off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack
handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch
before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the
wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a
back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the
lugnut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a
rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins
are firmly seated around the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
6
8-Stud — Dual Rear Wheels
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug
nuts are a two piece assembly. When the tires are being
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add 2 drops
of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer.
Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the
inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assem-
bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the
inner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening to insure
wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut
tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to cor-
rectly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to
remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle
lifting device.
NOTE: When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear
wheel end combination, the tire diameter of the two
individual tires must be compared. If there is a significant
difference, the larger tire should be installed in a front
location. Correct direction of rotation for dual tire instal-
lations must also be observed.
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows: 1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a
snug fit.
2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a
second time to verify that specific torque has been
achieved. Retighten to specifications at 100 miles (160
km) and after 500 miles (800 km).
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles
of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly
set. All nuts should first be firmly seated against the
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
6
wheel. The nuts should then be tightened to recom-
mended torque. Tighten the nuts to final torque in
increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening
the nut opposite to the nut just previously tightened until
final torque is achieved. Recommended torques are
shown in the following chart.
Disc
Wheels
Type
Nut
Stud
Size
Torque
Ft. Lbs.
Torque
Newton
Meters
Cone 9/16-18 120-150 160-200
Flanged 9/16-18 130-160 190-220
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube. Rotate the
winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place
against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click 3 or 4
times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire
several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
locations, refer to the graphics that show jacking loca-
tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be
used on any other parts or the underbody.
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING
WARNING!
To prevent personal injury or damage to clothing, do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or fabrics.
Do not lean over a battery when connecting jumper
cables or allow cable clamps to touch each other.
Keep open flames or sparks away from battery vent
holes. Always wear eye protection when working
with batteries.
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source that has a greater than 12 volt system, i.e. do
not use a 24 volt power source.
NOTE: Replacement batteries should both be of equal
size to prevent damage to the vehicles charging system.
Your vehicle is equipped with two 12–volt batteries. If it
becomes necessary to use a booster battery, with jumper
cables, to start a vehicle’s engine because its batteries are
discharged, the following procedure should be followed:
Set the parking brake and place an automatic transmis-
sion in PARK (or NEUTRAL for a manual transmission).
Turn off lights, heater and other electrical loads. Observe
charge indicator (if equipped) in both batteries. If indica-
tor (if equipped) is light or yellow on either battery,
replace that battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
6
CAUTION!
Use the Jump Start Procedure only when the charge
indicator (if equipped) in both batteries is dark in the
center. Do not attempt jump starting when either
battery charge indicator (if equipped) is bright or
yellow. If charge indicator (if equipped) has a green
dot in the center, failure to start is not due to a
discharged battery and cranking system should be
checked.
1. Attach one jumper cable to the positive terminal of
booster battery and the other end of the same cable to the
positive terminal of the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to negative
(-) post of booster battery. Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to a good ground on the engine block of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure a good
connection is made, free of dirt and grease.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
•
During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump start.
3. Take care that the clamps from one cable do not
inadvertently touch clamps from the other cable. Do not
lean over the battery when making connection. The
negative connection must provide good electrical con-
ductivity and current carrying capacity.
4. After the engine is started or if the engine fails to start,
cables must be disconnected in the following order:
a. Disconnect the negative cable at the engine ground.
b. Disconnect the negative cable at the negative post
on booster battery.
c. Disconnect the cable from the positive post of both
batteries.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
6
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
With Portable Starting Unit
There are many types of these units available. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for necessary precautions
and operation.
CAUTION!
It is very important that the starting unit operating
voltage does not exceed 12 Volts D.C. or damage to
battery, starter motor, alternator, or electrical system
may occur.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear
selector rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE
(automatic transmissions) and between 1st and RE-
VERSE (manual transmissions), while applying slight
pressure to the accelerator.
In general, the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine is most effective. Racing the engine or
spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of not freeing
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
the vehicle, may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
selector in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating
and reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps and chains may break, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
6
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
the main structural members of the vehicle—not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
applying to vehicles under tow must be observed.
4-Wheel- Drive Vehicles
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the transfer case while towing,
always use one of the following methods.
NOTE: The Transfer Case must be in the neutral posi-
tion, and the transmission must be in Park (Automatic
Transmission), or in gear (Manual Transmission) to tow a
4WD vehicle with one end of the vehicle raised.
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
2–Wheel- Drive Vehicles
Provided that transmission is operable, tow on a flatbed
or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
dolly.
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 6.7L Diesel Engine ....408
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.9L Diesel Engine ....409
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) .........410
䡵 Replacement Parts ......................410
䡵 Engine Data Plate ......................411
䡵 Dealer Service .........................411
䡵 Service Information .....................411
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ..................414
▫ Engine Oil ..........................414
▫ DriveBelt...........................422
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter
(5.9L Diesel Engine) ...................422
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter
(6.7L Diesel Engines) ...................424
▫ Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter
(5.9L Diesel Engine) ...................427
▫ Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter
(6.7L Diesel Engine) ...................430
7
▫ Intervention Regeneration Strategy – EVIC
Message Process Flow (Catalyst Full Message)
(6.7L Diesel Engines Only) ...............434
▫ Maintenance Free Batteries ...............437
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............438
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check ............439
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints ..............440
▫ Steering Linkage — Inspection ............440
▫ Front Prop Shaft Lubrication .............441
▫ Front Axle Universal Drive Joints And Pivot
Bearings ............................441
▫ Body Lubrication .....................441
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ................442
▫ Windshield Washers ...................442
▫ Exhaust System ......................443
▫ Cooling System .......................444
▫ Fan ...............................450
▫ Charge Air Cooler (Inter-Cooler) ..........450
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .......451
▫ Brake System ........................451
▫ Clutch Linkage .......................453
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System ................453
▫ Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle
Fluid Level ..........................454
▫ Transfer Case — If Equipped .............455
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......455
▫ Automatic Transmission ................455
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Wheel Bearings ..................458
▫ Noise Control System Required Maintenance &
Warranty ...........................458
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................463
䡵 Fuses (Integrated Power Module) ...........468
䡵 Vehicle Storage ........................472
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs .................473
䡵 Bulb Replacement ......................474
▫ Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park And
Turn Lights .........................474
▫ Fog Lights ..........................477
▫ Tail, Stop, Turn And Backup Lights .........478
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight (CHMSL)
WithCargoLight .....................481
▫ Cab Top Clearance Lights — If Equipped ....482
▫ Tailgate ID Lights (Dual Rear Wheels) —
If Equipped .........................484
▫ Rear Light Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheel)
— If Equipped .......................485
▫ Side Marker Lights (Dual Rear Wheels) ......486
䡵 Fluid Capacities ........................487
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ........488
▫ Engine .............................488
▫ Chassis ............................491
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.9L DIESEL ENGINE
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
7
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Vehicles equipped with California emissions controls
have a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called
OBDII. This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating properly,
your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel
economy, as well as engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be driveable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” on could cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any
emissions tests can be performed.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE DATA PLATE
Use the information from the engine data plate when
discussing service or sourcing parts for your engine. The
engine data plate is located on the intake side of the
breather cover.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
SERVICE INFORMATION
Mopar Fluids, Lubricants and Parts are available from
your dealer and will help you keep your vehicle operat-
ing at its best. Your dealer also has the qualified service
personnel, special tools and equipment to perform all
service operations in an expert manner. Service manuals
are available which include detailed service information
for your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempt-
ing any procedure yourself. See Service Publications
information at the back of this manual.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
7
CAUTION!
To maintain your vehicle safely follow these
guidelines:
•
Watch your vehicle’s mileage and check your Mainte-
nance Schedules regularly for required servicing. Ex-
cessive wear or damage to certain vehicle components
can result if required services are not performed.
•
If you have your vehicle undercoated, inspect for
undercoating material on the propeller shafts. Such
material could cause the shafts to become unbalanced
and result in drivetrain vibrations. Remove any under-
coating with solvent.
•
If you have your vehicle undercoated, make sure no
undercoating material is sprayed on the exhaust sys-
tem or components of the seat belt system.
NOTE: It is not possible for the manufacturer and
Cummins, Inc. to anticipate every possible circumstance
that can involve a potential hazard.
WARNING!
To maintain your vehicle safely and avoid personal
injury, follow these guidelines:
•
Never spray or pour diesel fuel, flammable liquid or
starting fluids (ether) into the air cleaner assembly, air
intake piping or turbocharger inlet in an attempt to
start the vehicle, unintended engine acceleration may
occur.
•
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent.
They can be unstable under certain conditions and be
hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If an engine has been operating and the coolant is hot,
allow the engine to cool before you slowly loosen the
filler cap and relieve the pressure from the cooling
system.
•
To avoid burns, remember that the engine components
will stay hot after the engine is shut off.
•
Do not use gasoline or other flammable materials to
clean parts. Always use approved cleaning solvents.
•
Relieve all pressure in the fuel, oil and cooling systems
before any lines, fittings or related items are removed
or disconnected. Be alert for possible pressure when
disconnecting any device from a system that utilizes
pressure. Do not check for pressure leaks with your
hand. High pressure oil or fuel can cause personal
injury.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious
injury or death.
•
Important: All maintenance other than that listed in
this manual, as well as some procedures listed here,
MUST be performed by your local Dodge Truck
Dealer. Your authorized Dodge Dealer has been
trained and has the necessary parts to maintain your
engine.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
7
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals. The best time to check
the oil level is before starting the engine after it has been
parked overnight. When checking oil after operating the
engine, first ensure the engine is at full operating tem-
perature, then wait at least 30 minutes after engine
shutdown to check the oil.
Checking the vehicle while it’s on level ground will also
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Add oil
only when the level on the dipstick is below the “ADD”
mark. The total capacity from the low mark to the high
mark is 2 quarts (1.9 liters).
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Never operate the engine with oil level below the “ADD”
mark or above the upper “SAFE” mark.
Change Engine Oil (5.9L Diesel Engine)
Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following to determine if any apply to you:
•
Frequent short trips where the engine does not achieve
full operating temperature (operating temperature de-
fined as 190° F (66° C ) coolant temperature).
•
Extensive engine idling (over 10 minutes per hour of
operation) at ambient temperatures less than 32° F (0°
C).
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Frequent trailer towing.
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-road or desert operation.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
7
•
Extensive operation at high engine speeds (greater
than 2900 rpm) and loads (greater than 70% throttle).
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown in schedule ⬙B⬙ of the ⬙Mainte-
nance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Mainte-
nance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ⬙B.⬙
Change Engine Oil (6.7L Diesel Engine)
Follow the 6.7L Diesel Maintenance Schedule for recom-
mended engine oil change intervals.
Engine Oil Selection (5.9L Diesel Engine)
1. Engine Oil Quality
Use only oils conforming to API Ser-
vice CI-4. A sulfated ash limit is speci-
fied for lubrication oil used in Cum-
mins engines. Oils with a high ash
content may produce deposits on
valves that can progress to guttering
and valve burning. A maximum sul-
fated ash content of 1.85 mass % is recommended for all
oil used in the engine.
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
The proper SAE viscosity of engine oil for the expected
ambient temperature range should be selected, as indi-
cated in the following chart:
NOTE: The same oil change interval is to be followed
for synthetic oil as for petroleum based oil. Also, syn-
thetic oil must meet the same performance specifications
as petroleum oil.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
7
Engine Oil Selection (6.7L Diesel Engines)
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
recommends engine oils that are API CJ-4 certified and
meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler. Use Mopar or
an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-10902.
Products meeting Cummins CES 20081 may also be used.
The identification of these engine oils are typically lo-
cated on the back of the oil container.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufacture
only recommends API Certified en-
gine oils.
Oils with a high ash content may produce deposits on
valves that can progress to guttering and valve burning.
A maximum sulfated ash content of 1.00 mass % is
recommended for all oil used in the engine.
The same oil change interval is to be followed for
synthetic oil as for petroleum based oil. Also, synthetic oil
must meet the same performance specifications as petro-
leum oil.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
Use SAE 15W-40 Engine Oil that meets
DaimlerChrysler Materials Standard MS-10902 and the
API CJ-4 engine oil category.
Engine oil not designated by the DaimlerChrysler or
Cummins Material Standards and API CJ-4 should not be
used, engine and exhaust system durability may be
compromised. For lower temperature operation SAE
5W-40 engine oils may be used. These oils must meet the
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
same requirements as stated previously. Your engine oil
filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscos-
ity for your vehicle.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes or
lube odorants) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi-
neered product and it’s performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
NOTE: The manufacturer offers a lube odorant (Mopar
Diesel Fresh) for diesel engines crankcases. The lube
odorant is recommended by the manufacturer to reduce
the sulfur smell that may occur during engine idling.
Engine Oil Filter
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
correct part number. The engine oil filter should be
changed at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil And Filter — Change
Operate the engine until the coolant temperature reaches
140°F (60°C). Shut the engine off. Remove the oil drain
plug.
Use a container that can hold at least 12 quarts (11.3
Liters) to hold the used oil.
Always check the condition of the used oil. This can give
you an indication of some engine problems that might
exist.
•
Thin, black oil indicates fuel dilution.
•
Milky discoloration indicates coolant dilution.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
7
Clean the area around the oil filter base. Remove the filter
from the underside of the vehicle using a cap style oil
filter wrench.
Clean the gasket surface of the filter mount. The filter
gasket can stick on the filter mount. Make sure it is
removed.
Change the engine oil filter with every engine oil change.
Only a high quality MOPAR filter should be used to
assure most efficient service.
CAUTION!
The filtering medium of other aftermarket filters
may disintegrate. Debris from failed filters may plug
the piston oil cooling nozzles, resulting in scuffed
pistons and engine failure.
CAUTION!
Fill the oil filter element with clean oil before instal-
lation. Use the same type oil that will be used in the
engine. When filling the oil filter, prevent foreign
material from falling into the filter. Severe engine
damage may occur.
Apply a light film of lubricating oil to the sealing surface
of the filter gasket before installing the filter.
CAUTION!
Overtightening may distort the threads or damage
the filter element seal.
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Install the filter as specified by the filter manufacturer.
Turn the filter 3/4 to one full turn after making contact
with the gasket.
Check the condition of the threads and sealing surface on
the oil pan and drain plug.
Install the drain plug and sealing washer and tighten to
37 ft-lbs. (50 N·m).
Use only high-quality multi-grade lubricating oil in your
Cummins Diesel Engine. Choose the correct oil for your
operating conditions as outlined in the Selection of
Engine Oil.
Cummins Turbo Diesel
Fill the engine with the correct grade of new oil. The
engine capacity is 11 quarts (10.4 liters) in the crankcase
and 1 quart (.95 liter) in the lubricating oil filter.
Start the engine and operate it at idle for several minutes.
Check for leaks at the lubricating oil filter and oil pan
drain plug.
Run the engine until it has reached operating tempera-
ture, stop the engine. Wait approximately 15 minutes to
let the oil in the upper parts of the engine drain back to
the pan. Check the oil level again.
Add oil as necessary to bring the level to the “SAFE”
mark on the dipstick.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of the used engine
fluids from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the environment.
Contact your local dealer, service station, or governmen-
tal agency for advice on recycling programs and where
used fluids and filters can be safely discarded in your
area.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
7
Drive Belt
Inspection
Check the belt for intersecting cracks.
•
Transverse (across the belt width) cracks are accept-
able.
•
Longitudinal (direction of belt length) cracks that
intersect with transverse cracks are NOT acceptable.
Replace the belt if it has unacceptable cracks, is frayed or
has pieces of material missing.
The engine speed sensor, located near the damper, should
be inspected for damage if a belt is frayed.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter (5.9L Diesel Engine)
CAUTION!
All air entering the engine intake must be filtered.
The abrasive particles in unfiltered air will cause
rapid wear to engine components.
The air filter housing on your Diesel Ram is equipped
with a Filter Minder™. This is an air flow restriction
gauge that will indicate when the filter element needs to
be replaced.
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not remove the top of the air filter housing to
inspect the filter element on your diesel engine under
normal operating conditions.
The clear plastic housing on the Filter Minder™ allows
you to view the amount of air pressure drop across the
filter element. It consists of a diaphragm and a calibrated
spring sealed inside the plastic housing. As the air
cleaner filter becomes clogged and air pressure drop
across the filter element increases, a yellow disc travels
along a graduated scale on the side of the Filter
Minder™.
The yellow disc will always show the greatest restriction
experienced by the filter element. When the disc reaches
the red zone, the filter element may need to be replaced.
There is no other time or mileage interval for changing
the air cleaner filter element.
If the vehicle experiences a sudden loss of engine power
when being driven in heavy snow or rain or when
plowing snow, check the Filter Minder™
•
If the Filter Minder™ is showing a plugged filter, the
filter should be visually inspected for snow/ice build
up or extreme water saturation.
•
The filter is not damaged, remove all snow/ice, rein-
stall filter and reset the Filter Minder™.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
7
A visual inspection of the air cleaner filter element is
never recommended under normal circumstances. A
badly restricted element may appear clean while a soiled
element may be quite effective in filtering particles
without restricting air flow. Rely on the Filter Minder™
to determine when a filter change is necessary.
After a new filter element is inserted, press the rubber
button on the top of the Filter Minder™. This action will
reset the yellow disc to the clean position.
CAUTION!
When using an engine cleaner or a degreaser, be sure
to wrap and tape the Filter Minder™ to protect the
plastic housing from damage and discoloration.
CAUTION!
Many aftermarket performance air filter elements do
not adequately filter the air entering the engine. Use
of such filters can severely damage your engine.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter (6.7L Diesel Engines)
CAUTION!
All air entering the engine intake must be filtered.
The abrasive particles in unfiltered air will cause
rapid wear to engine components.
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The air filter housing on your Diesel Ram is equipped
with a Filter Minder™. This is an air flow restriction
gauge that will indicate when the filter element needs to
be replaced.
Do not remove the top of the air filter housing to
inspect the filter element on your diesel engine under
normal operating conditions.
NOTE: The air filter housing contains a Mass Air Flow
sensor. This sensor is critical to proper engine operation
and component longevity. Any damage or modification
to this sensor could result in major engine and/or
exhaust aftertreatment damage. This includes the use of
non-approved air filters. Use only MOPAR威 approved air
filters or equivalent.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
7
The clear plastic housing on the Filter Minder™ allows
you to view the amount of air pressure drop across the
filter element. It consists of a diaphragm and a calibrated
spring sealed inside the plastic housing. As the air
cleaner filter becomes clogged and air pressure drop
across the filter element increases, a yellow disc travels
along a graduated scale on the side of the Filter
Minder™.
The yellow disc will always show the greatest restriction
experienced by the filter element. When the disc reaches
the red zone, the filter element may need to be replaced.
There is no other time or mileage interval for changing
the air cleaner filter element.
If the vehicle experiences a sudden loss of engine power
when being driven in heavy snow or rain or when
plowing snow, check the Filter Minder™
•
If the Filter Minder™ is showing a plugged filter, the
filter should be visually inspected for snow/ice build
up or extreme water saturation.
•
If the filter is not damaged, remove all snow/ice,
reinstall filter and reset the Filter Minder™.
A visual inspection of the air cleaner filter element is
never recommended under normal circumstances. A
badly restricted element may appear clean while a soiled
element may be quite effective in filtering particles
without restricting air flow. Rely on the Filter Minder™
to determine when a filter change is necessary.
After a new filter element is inserted, press the rubber
button on the top of the Filter Minder™. This action will
reset the yellow disc to the clean position.
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
When using an engine cleaner or a degreaser, be sure
to wrap and tape the Filter Minder™ to protect the
plastic housing from damage and discoloration.
CAUTION!
Many aftermarket performance air filter elements do
not adequately filter the air entering the engine. Use
of such filters can severely damage your engine.
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter (5.9L Diesel
Engine)
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter when the
engine is running.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
7
NOTE: Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately dis-
carded, can present a problem to the environment. Con-
tact your local authorized dealer, service station, or
government agency for advice on recycling programs
and for where used fluids and filters can be properly
disposed of in your area.
NOTE: The fuel filter and water separator assembly is
located on the driver’s side of the engine.
Drain a small amount from the fuel/water separator
filter periodically or when the WATER IN FUEL indicator
lamp is on. Pull outward on the drain valve lever, located
on the side of the filter, and allow any accumulated water
to drain. Hold the drain valve open until all water and
contaminants have been removed. Close the drain release
valve, by returning it to the inward position, when clean
fuel is visible.
NOTE: The Fuel / Water separator drain valve is
identified by its yellow handle and is located on the
inboard side of the fuel filter housing.
If more than a couple ounces of fuel has been drained,
follow the directions below for “Priming if the engine has
run out of fuel.”
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious
injury or death.
Priming if the engine has run out of fuel
1. Add a substantial quantity of fuel to the tank 5 to 10
gallons (19L to 38L).
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Crank the engine for 1 to 2 seconds. If the engine does
not start, then release the key or starter button back to the
RUN position (do not turn the key back to the OFF
position). The electric fuel transfer pump will continue to
run and purge air from the system for about 25 seconds.
After 25 seconds, attempt to start the engine again.
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting Procedure.
4. Repeat the procedure if the engine does not start.
CAUTION!
Do not engage the starter motor for more than 15
seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between the
cranking intervals.
NOTE: The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage black top paving surfaces.
Drain the filter into an appropriate container.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions
and be hazardous or explosive when mixed with
diesel fuel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
7
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, the
use of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel
system.
NOTE: A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting
ASTM specification D-6751 may be used with your
Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
NOTE: As sufficient testing as not been completed,
ethanol blends are not recommended or approved for use
with your Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
NOTE: In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper operation of your
Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter (6.7L Diesel
Engine)
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter when the
engine is running.
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new
fuel filter. There is a possibility debris could be
introduced into the fuel filter during this action. It is
best to install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift
pump to prime the fuel system.
NOTE: The fuel filter and water separator assembly is
located on the driver’s side of the engine. The best access
to the water drain valve is through the driver’s side
wheel well.
NOTE: If water is detected in the water separator while
the engine is running or while the key is in the on
position, the water in fuel light will illuminate and an
audible chime will be heard 5 times. At this point you
should stop the engine and drain the water from the
separator.
If the water in fuel light comes on and a single chime is
heard while you are driving, or with the key in the ON
position, there may be a problem with your water
separator wiring or sensor. See your authorized dealer
for service.
Upon proper draining of the water from the fuel filter, the
water in fuel light will remain illuminated for approxi-
mately 10 seconds. If the water was drained while the
engine was running, the water in fuel light may remain
on for approximately 3 minutes.
NOTE: Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately dis-
carded, can present a problem to the environment. Con-
tact your local dealer, service station, or government
agency for advice on recycling programs and for where
used fluids and filters can be properly disposed of in
your area.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
7
Drain a small amount from the fuel/water separator
filter monthly or when the WATER IN FUEL indicator
lamp is on. Turn the drain valve, located on the bottom of
the filter, counterclockwise and allow any accumulated
water to drain into an approved container. Leave the
drain valve open until all water and contaminants have
been removed. Close the drain valve, by turning it
clockwise, when clean fuel is visible.
NOTE: The Fuel / Water separator drain valve is
located on the bottom of the fuel filter housing.
If more than a couple ounces of fuel has been drained,
follow the directions below for “Priming if the engine has
run out of fuel.”
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious
injury or death.
Priming if the engine has run out of fuel
1. Add a substantial quantity of fuel to the tank 5 to 10
gallons (19L to 38L).
2. Crank the engine for 1 to 2 seconds. If the engine does
not start, then release the key or starter button back to the
RUN position (do not turn the key back to the OFF
position). The electric fuel transfer pump will continue to
run and purge air from the system for about 25 seconds.
After 25 seconds, attempt to start the engine again.
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting Procedure.
4. Repeat the procedure if the engine does not start.
CAUTION!
Do not engage the starter motor for more than 15
seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between the
cranking intervals.
NOTE: The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage black top paving surfaces.
Drain the filter into an appropriate container.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions
and be hazardous or explosive when mixed with
diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, the
use of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel
system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
7
NOTE: A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting
ASTM specification D-6751 may be used with your
Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle. Use of bio-diesel
mixture in excess of 5% can negatively impact the on-
engine fuel filter’s ability to separate water from the fuel,
resulting in high pressure fuel system corrosion or dam-
age.
NOTE: As sufficient testing as not been completed,
ethanol blends are not recommended or approved for use
with your Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
NOTE: In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper operation of your
Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
Intervention Regeneration Strategy – EVIC
Message Process Flow (Catalyst Full Message)
(6.7L Diesel Engines Only)
Your new Cummins 6.7L diesel meets all EPA Heavy
Duty Diesel Engine Emissions Standards, resulting in the
lowest emitting diesel engine ever produced.
To achieve these emission standards your vehicle is
equipped with state of the art engine and exhaust system.
The engine and exhaust aftertreatment system work
together to achieve the EPA Heavy Duty Diesel Engine
Emissions Standards. These systems are seamlessly inte-
grated into your vehicle and managed by the Cummins
6.7L engine Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM
manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust sys-
tem’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Additionally, the overhead console in your vehicle has
the ability to alert you to additional maintenance re-
quired on your truck or engine. Refer to the following
messages that may be displayed on your Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC):
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
Perform Service
The 6.7L Cummins engine utilizes a Closed Crankcase
Ventilation (CCV) system, EGR Valve and a EGR Cooler.
This system filters and recycles gasses produced in the
crankcase during the normal combustion process. Per-
form Service will be displayed on the overhead console of
your vehicle if the CCV filter, EGR Valve and EGR Cooler
is due for required maintenance. The CCV filter is located
on the top of the engine valve cover. For additional
information, see your local authorized dealer.
Catalyst Full See Owner Manual
Catalyst Full See Owner Manual will be displayed on the
overhead console of your vehicle if the exhaust particu-
late filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage capacity.
Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low
speed driving cycles, your Cummins engine and exhaust
aftertreatment system may never reach the conditions
required to remove the trapped PM, if this occurs Cata-
lyst Full See Owner Manual will be displayed on the
overhead console in your vehicle. If this message is
displayed you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
you of this condition.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
7
Catalyst Stat::::::::::80%
Catalyst Stat::::::::::80% will replace the message Catalyst
Full See Owner Manual after it is displayed for one
minute. The engine Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
will continue to monitor the amount of particulate matter
trapped in the particulate filter. This message indicates
the percentage of the particulate filter capacity that has
been used.
By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds for as
little as 45 minutes you can remedy the condition in the
particulate filter system and allow your Cummins engine
and exhaust Aftertreatment system to remove the
trapped PM and restore the system to normal operating
condition.
Catalyst Stat:::::::::::80%, 90%, 99%
Catalyst Stat:::::::::::80%, 90%, 99% If you are unable to
drive your vehicle under these conditions for an ex-
tended period of time after the initial warning notifica-
tion, the Engine PCM will continue to monitor the
particulate filter and will display the progression of
particulate filter usage (80, 90, 99%) on the EVIC message
center.
CATALYST FULL SERVICE REQD
If the particulate filter reaches 99% of it’s capacity the
overhead console in your vehicle will chime twice and
display the message CATALYST FULL SERVICE REQD.
At this point the engine PCM will register a fault code,
the instrument panel will display a MIL light and the
engine PCM will derate the truck reducing its horse-
power and torque output.
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The PCM derates the engine in order to limit the likeli-
hood of permanent damage to the aftertreatment system.
If this condition is not corrected and a dealer service is
not performed, extensive exhaust aftertreatment damage
can occur. In order to correct this condition it will be
necessary to have the truck serviced by your local
authorized dealer.
Maintenance Free Batteries
The top of the maintenance free batteries are perma-
nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: Replacement batteries should both be of equal
capacity to prevent damage to the vehicle’s charging
system.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
7
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
positive and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Battery Blanket Usage
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the battery
temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°). For the same de-
crease in temperature, the engine requires twice as much
power to crank at the same RPM. The use of 120 VAC
powered battery blankets will greatly increase starting
capability at low temperatures. Suitable battery blankets
are available from your authorized Mopar威 dealer.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.⬙
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
7
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
The ball joints originally supplied with the vehicle are
permanently lubricated at the factory and do not require
service. The ball joints and seals should be inspected
whenever the vehicle is serviced for other reasons.
Steering Linkage — Inspection
Whenever the vehicle is hoisted, all steering linkage
joints should be inspected for evidence of damage. If
seals are damaged, parts should be replaced to prevent
leakage or contamination of the grease.
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Prop Shaft Lubrication
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
change listed in the appropriate Maintenance Schedule
for your vehicle (Schedule “A” and “B”). Use Mopar威
type MS-6560 (lithium based grease), or equivalent.
Front Axle Universal Drive Joints And Pivot
Bearings
The front axle universal joint and pivot bearings are
permanently lubricated and do not require servicing.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Front Driveshaft Grease Fitting
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
7
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not ra-
diator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution, used with water as
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces
the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not
harmful to paint or trim.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
7
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
low the preceding safety tips.
Exhaust System Rubber Isolator and Loop-Type
Hanger — If Equipped
Inspect surfaces whenever the vehicle is hoisted for
rubber to metal separation or deep cracks. If, however,
excessively deep localized cracks are present, or any part
of the exhaust system abnormally contacts the under-
body hardware, the isolator and/or hanger should be
replaced.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, don’t open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Extremely cold ambient temperature may require the
addition of a “winter front” for effective operation of the
cab heating/cooling system. Make certain that a percent-
age of the radiator is exposed for adequate air flow
through the charge air cooler and automatic transmission
oil cooler. The percentage of opening must be increased
with the increasing ambient air temperature and/or
engine load. If the cooling fan can be heard cycling
frequently, increase the size of the opening in the winter
front.
Coolant bottle level check
The coolant reserve system provides a quick visual
method of determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine idling, and warmed to the normal
operating temperature, the level of the coolant on the
coolant bottle should be between the fluid level marks.
Check the coolant level whenever the hood is raised.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no longer a need to remove the coolant pressure cap
except for checking coolant freeze point or replacement
with new antifreeze coolant.
WARNING!
Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to
cool overheated engine! The coolant is under pres-
sure and severe scalding could result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
7
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en-
gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant
is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, it should be replaced with the specified cool-
ant as soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi-
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
⫺34°F (⫺37°C ) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
7
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. Do not store ethylene glycol-based engine
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals and
children. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine cold, the level of the coolant in the coolant
recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
7
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Fan
Inspection
Check the fan for cracks and bent or broken blades. If any
of these conditions exist, you must replace the fan. Make
sure it is securely mounted.
NOTE: This service procedure must be performed by a
trained service technician. Make arrangements with your
authorized Dodge Truck Dealer for this inspection.
Charge Air Cooler (Inter-Cooler)
The charge air cooler is positioned between the radiator
and the air conditioner condenser. Air enters the engine
through the air cleaner and passes through the turbo-
charger where it is pressurized. This pressurized air
rapidly reaches high temperature. The air is then directed
through a hose to the charge air cooler and through
another hose to the intake manifold of the engine. The air
entering the engine has been cooled by about 50 to 100
degrees Fahrenheit. This cooling process enables more
efficient burning of fuel resulting in fewer emissions.
To guarantee optimum performance of the system, keep
the surfaces of the charge air cooler, condenser and
radiator clean and free of debris. Periodically check the
hoses leading to and from the charge air cooler for cracks
or loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and reduced
engine performance.
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Brake System
Power Disc Brakes (Front and Rear)
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
7
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immedi-
ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“FULL” dot and an “ADD” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
full mark because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
correct Fluid type.
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or unidentified as to specification, may
result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged
braking. You could have an accident.
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage and loss of brake
performance may result.
Brake Hoses
Inspection should be performed whenever the brake
system is serviced or at intervals specified. Inspect hy-
draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing or worn
spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately!
Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with
possible burst failure.
Clutch Linkage
If the clutch pedal linkage begins to squeak or grunt, the
clutch pedal pivot bushings should be lubricated. Refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct
lubricant type. Multipurpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P.
Clutch Hydraulic System
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance-free
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the
system must be replaced.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
7
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For Model 9.25 Front Axles and 10.5”/11.5” Rear Axles
refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
correct lubricant type. For normal service, periodic fluid
level checks are not required. When the vehicle is ser-
viced for other reasons, the exterior surfaces of the axle
assembly should be inspected.
When checking the fluid level, the vehicle should be in a
level position. The fluid level should be 1/4” ± 1/4” (6.4
mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the 9.25” Front Axle.
The fluid level should be 3/4” ± 1/4” (19 mm ± 6.4 mm)
below the fill hole on all 10.5” and 1/4” ± 1/4” (6.4 mm
± 6.4 mm) on 11.5” Rear Axles.
Drain And Refill
Vehicles operated in normal service do not have regularly
scheduled oil changes. If fluid has become contaminated
with water or subjected to severe service, follow the
recommended change intervals in Maintenance Schedule
“B” in Section 8 of this manual.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
correct lubricant type.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials in vehicles equipped with
10.5”/11.5” Axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited slip
oil additive (friction modifiers).
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Transfer Case — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
correct lubricant type.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. If the level of the lubricant is more than 1/4” below
the bottom of the filler hole while the vehicle is on level
ground, enough lubricant should be added to bring the
level to the bottom of the filler hole.
Lubricant Selection for 6-Speed Manual
Transmission — If Equipped
If it becomes necessary to add fluid or change the fluid,
be sure to use the same lubricant or equivalent. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct
lubricant type.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be checked when the engine is
fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at
normal operating temperature. Operation of the trans-
mission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce
the life of the transmission and of the fluid. Check the
fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
7
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level
To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level,
the following procedure must be used:
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
3. Fully apply parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector briefly in each gear position
ending with the lever in N (Neutral).
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C) which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 15 miles. The fluid can not be
comfortably held between the finger tips. Warm is when
fluid is between 85° - 125°F (29° - 52°C).
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “OK”.
b. If the fluid is warm, the reading should be between
the two holes. If the fluid level indicates low, add
sufficient fluid to bring to the proper level.
Fluid is added through the dipstick tube.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
certain that the dipstick cap is properly seated.
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Lubricant
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
correct lubricant type. It is important that the transmis-
sion fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the
recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change
To obtain best performance and long life for automatic
transmissions, the manufacturer recommends that they
be given regular maintenance service by an Authorized
Dodge Dealer or Service Center. It is important that the
transmission be adjusted periodically, the fluid main-
tained at the correct level, and that it be drained and
refilled as specified.
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
transmission. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for the correct lubricant type. A band adjustment
and filter change should be made at the time of the oil
change.
The fluid and filter(s) should be changed and the bands
adjusted (if equipped) as specified in the Maintenance
Schedule (Section 8). Vehicles with a 5.9L Diesel Engine,
having severe usage should follow Maintenance Sched-
ule “B” of the Maintenance Schedule (Section 8).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
7
Severe usage consists of:
•
Off-the-highway operation;
•
Trailer towing;
•
Snow plow operation;
•
Prolonged operation with heavy loading, especially in
hot weather.
NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any
reason, the fluid and filter should be changed, and the
bands adjusted (if equipped).
Special Additives
The manufacturer recommends against the addition of
any additives to the transmission. Exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be avoided,
since they may adversely affect seals.
Front Wheel Bearings
Front wheel bearings for all Dodge Ram Trucks are
sealed-for-life. They do not require greasing or seal
replacement. In some instances, these bearings will
“purge” excess grease and the bearing housing will look
slightly wet. This is normal.
•
Periodic inspection for excess play is recommended.
•
If a bearing assembly is accidentally separated when
servicing the brake rotors, it should be replaced.
Rear Wheel Bearings
Clean and repack when brake linings are replaced or
rotors resurfaced.
Noise Control System Required Maintenance &
Warranty
For 3500 Two-Wheel Drive and Four-Wheel Drive mod-
els over 10,000 lbs. (4 535 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating.
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
All vehicles built over 10,000 lbs. (4 535 kg) Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating and manufactured for sale and use in the
United States are required to comply with the Federal
Government’s Exterior Noise Regulations. These vehicles
can be identified by the Noise Emission Control Label
located in the operator’s compartment.
Required Maintenance For Noise Control Systems
The following maintenance services must be performed
every 6 months or 6,000 miles (9 600 km), whichever
comes first, to assure proper operation of the noise
control systems. In addition, inspection and service
should be performed anytime a malfunction is observed
or suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire vehicle
will help the effectiveness of the noise control systems.
Exhaust System
Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and damaged
parts. Devices such as hangers, clamps, and U-bolts
should be tight and in good condition. Damaged compo-
nents, burned or blown out mufflers, burned or rusted
out exhaust pipes should be replaced according to the
procedures and specifications outlined in the appropriate
service manual.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
7
Air Cleaner Assembly
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly and fit.
Make certain that the air cleaner is properly positioned
and that the cover is tight. Check all hoses leading to the
air cleaner for tightness. The air filter element must also
be clean and serviced according to the instructions out-
lined in the Maintenance Schedule Section of this
manual.
Tampering With Noise Control System Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof: (1) the removal or rendering inoperative by any
person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or
replacement, of any device or element of design incorpo-
rated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate
purchaser or while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle
after such device or element of design has been removed
or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
•
AIR CLEANER
−
Removal of the air cleaner.
−
Removal of the air cleaner filter element from the air
cleaner housing.
−
Removal of the air ducting.
•
EXHAUST SYSTEM
−
Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust system
components including the muffler or tailpipe.
•
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
−
Removal or rendering inoperative the fan clutch.
−
Removal of the fan shroud.
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Noise Emission Warranty
The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as manufac-
tured by the manufacturer, was designed, built and
equipped to conform at the time it left the manufacturer’s
control with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regu-
lations.
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and
equipped by the manufacturer, and is not limited to any
particular part, component or system of the vehicle
manufactured by the manufacturer. Defects in design,
assembly or in any part, component or system of the
vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at
the time it left the manufacturer’s control, caused noise
emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by
this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
7
Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Diesel Engines)
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to
the mileage at which service was performed.
MILES 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500 45,000 52,500 60,000
KILOMETERS 12 000 24 000 36 000 48 000 60 000 72 000 84 000 96 000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES 67,500 75,000 82,500 90,000 97,500 84,000 105,00 112,500
KILOMETERS 108 000 120 000 132 000 144 000 126 000 156 000 168 000 181 000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and
Tar Remover to remove.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
7
•
Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabra-
sive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel
wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar
cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
equipped
YES Essentials威 seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-purpose cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tials products.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
7
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
7
FUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE)
An integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside cover
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
1 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet Console
2 20 Amp
Yellow
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN) Door
Locks
3 20 Amp
Yellow
Spare
4 15 Amp
Blue
Aisin Transmission
Controls — If
Equipped (Diesel Only)
5 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Sunroof
6 10 Amp
Red
Vistronic Fan/
Wastegate Solenoid
7 15 Amp
Blue
Reverse Lockout Sole-
noid Battery (SRT-10
Only)
Integrated Power Module Location
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
8 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors
9 30 Amp
Pink
Off Road Module
Power
10 5 Amp
Orange
Trx-Off Rd Pkg Sen
(Gas Engine Only)
11 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD)-Cabin Compart-
ment Node (CCN)/
Radio/Under Hood
Lamp/Wireless Control
Module (WCM)/
Satellite Digital Audio
Receiver (SDARS)/
Hands Free Module
(HFM)/EOM
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
12 30 Amp
Pink
Electric Brake
13 25 Amp
Natural
Power-Battery RWAL/
ABS Module Feed
14 15 Amp
Blue
Park Lamps Left
15 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Park Lamps
16 15 Amp
Blue
Park Lamps Right
17 15 Amp
Blue
Spare
18 40 Amp
Green
ABS Pump
19 30 Amp
Pink
Trailer Tow Battery
Feed
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
7
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
20 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraints
Controller (ORC) 2
21 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraints/
Pass Disable Switch
22 2 Amp
Gray
IGN Switch Feed
23 10 Amp
Red
HVAC
24 20 Amp
Blue
AISIN Relay Feed — If
Equipped
25 10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror/T-Case
Brake
26 20 Amp
Yellow
Brake Switch/Center
High Mount Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)/
Aftermarket CHMSL
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
27 40 Amp
Green
Power Seats
28 10 Amp
Red
Power Run/Start-
PCM/Steering Angle
Sensor
29 10 Amp
Red
4X4 Switch/Pass Dr
Switch/EC Mirror
30 15 Amp
Blue
Power Run/Start-ABS/
RWAL/Smart Bar/
YAW Sensor/Uego
Sensor Controller
31 10 Amp
Red
PCM (Gas)/TCM (Die-
sel 58RFE)
32 10 Amp
Red
Power Ignition Run —
Adjustable Pedals LED
33 10 Amp
Red
Power-IGN Run —
HVAC
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
34 10 Amp
Red
Spare
35 15 Amp
Blue
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN) Illumina-
tion
36 25 Amp
Natural
Audio_Amplifier
37 15 Amp
Blue
Variable Gate Turbo
(VGT) — Turbo Diesel
38 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet IP
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
39 10 Amp
Red
Seatbelt Tension
Reducer/Power IGN
Run/Acc
40 20 Amp
Yellow
Power IGN Run/Acc
— Cigar Lighter/Rear
Power Point
41 25 Amp
Natural
Spare
42 30 Amp
Pink
Diesel PCM (Diesel
Only)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
7
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
•
Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse
located in the Integrated Power Module, located in the
engine compartment. The I.O.D. cavity includes a
snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be discon-
nected, without removing it from the fuse block.
•
The electronic shift transfer case should be placed in
the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the
battery drain.
•
As an alternative to the above steps you may, discon-
nect the negative cables from both batteries.
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE: When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until
fully seated, the gages in the Instrument Cluster will do
a full sweep, when the ignition key is cycled to RUN. This
is a normal condition.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Inside Bulb No.
Overhead Console Lights ...............TS212-2
Dome Light............................ 7679
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
LIGHT BULBS — Outside Bulb No.
Back-Up ..............................3057
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp ............. 912
Fog Lamp ...........................9006LL
Headlamp (Halogen) .....................H13
Side Marker Bulb .......................W5W
Park & Turn Signal ................... 3157NAK
Rear License Plate Lamp ................... 168
Rear Cargo Light.........................912
Tail & Stop ............................ 3057
Cab Clearance Lights ......................168
Dual Rear Wheel Sidemarker Light ............ 168
Dual Rear Wheel Tailgate ID Lights (3) .........168
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
7
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn Lights
CAUTION!
This is a halogen bulb. Avoid touching the glass with
your fingers. Reduced bulb life will result.
1. Open the hood
2. Remove the two (2) bolts from the front of the head-
light housing.
Front Headlight Housing Bolts
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the plug from the inner fender well and
remove the nut through the access hole.
Inner Fender Plug
Rear Headlight Housing Nut Access
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
7
4. Pull the housing out from the fender to allow room to
disconnect the electrical connectors.
NOTE: For easier removal, pull the headlight assembly
straight forward, applying the greatest amount of force to
the outer edge of the headlight assembly.
5. Unlock and pull connector straight from the base of
the headlight halogen bulb.
Headlight Removal
Bulb Removal
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Twist connector on the side marker/turn signal/park
light bulb
1
⁄
4
turn and remove connector and bulb from
housing.
7. Remove housing from vehicle with headlight halogen
bulb in housing.
8. Twist the headlight halogen bulb
1
⁄
4
turn and remove
headlight bulb from the housing.
9. Replace headlight or side marker/turn signal/park
light bulb. Do not touch the headlight halogen bulb.
10. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
Fog Lights
1. Reach under the vehicle, unlock and twist connector
counterclockwise
1
⁄
4
turn and remove connector and bulb
from housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
7
2. Pull bulb straight from the connector.
3. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
Tail, Stop, Turn and Backup Lights
1. Remove the two (2) screws that pass through the bed
sheetmetal.
Removing the Two (2) Screws
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the housing straight out from the body, with a
quick motion, to separate the housing from the body. If
not pulled straight, locators may be damaged.
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove
from the housing.
Pulling Housing From Body
Rotating Bulb Socket From Housing
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
7
4. Pull bulb straight out of socket. 5. Reverse Procedure to install bulb and housing. Place
the two raised blocks passed the body.
Pulling Bulb From Socket
Sliding Raised Blocks Past Body
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stoplight (CHMSL) With
Cargo Light
1. Remove the two (2) screws holding the housing/lens
to the body as shown.
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wir-
ing harness to the body.
3. Turn desired bulb socket
1
⁄
4
turn and remove socket
and bulb from housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
7
4. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.
•
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
•
Inside Bulb: Center High Mount Stop Lamp
5. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
Cab Top Clearance Lights — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the light.
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the socket
1
⁄
4
turn and pull it from the light
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
7
Tailgate ID Lights (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
1. Remove the two screws and housing and access the
bulb sockets from the rear.
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Turn socket
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise to access the
bulb.
3. Pull bulb straight out from socket.
4. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
Rear Light Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheel) — If
Equipped
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access
to the bulb sockets.
2. Turn the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise to access
the bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
7
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
Side Marker Lights (Dual Rear Wheels)
1. Push rearward on the side marker light assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn socket
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise and remove from
assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
FLUID CAPACITIES U.S. Metric
Fuel
2500 Shortbed Models 34 gal. 128L
2500 Longbed Models 35 gal. 132L
3500 Shortbed Models 34 gal. 128L
3500 Longbed Models 35 gal. 132L
FLUID CAPACITIES U.S. Metric
Engine Oil
5.9L Diesel Engine I-6 12.0 qts. 11.4L
6.7L HO Turbo Diesel
Engine (SAE 15W-40, API
CJ-4 Certified, that meets
CES 20081 Standards.)
12 qts. 11.4L
Cooling System
5.9L Diesel Engine I-6 7 gal. 26.5L
6.7L Diesel Engine I-6 22.6 qts. 21.4L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
7
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Ad-
ditive Technology) or equivalent.
5.9L HO Turbo Diesel
Engine Oil
Use (SAE 15W-40, API CI-4/SM Certified, that meets DaimlerChrysler Standards.)
6.7L HO Turbo Diesel
Engine Oil
Use (SAE 15W-40, API CJ-4 Certified, that meets CES 20081 Standards.)
Engine Oil Filter
( 5.9L Diesel Engine )
Mopar威 Engine Oil Filter, P/N 05083285AA or equivalent.
Engine Oil Filter
( 6.7L Diesel Engine )
Mopar威 Engine Oil Filter, P/N 05083285AA or equivalent.
Engine Fuel Filter
( 5.9L Diesel Engine )
Mopar威 Fuel Filter, P/N 05015581AB or equivalent.
Engine Fuel Filter
( 6.7L Diesel Engine )
Mopar威 Fuel Filter, P/N 05183410AA or equivalent. Must meet 7 micron rating. Using
a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturers filtration and water separating re-
quirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Crankcase Ventilation
Filter
( 6.7L Diesel Engine )
Mopar威 CCV Filter, P/N 68001433AA or equivalent.
Fuel Selection
( 5.9L Diesel Engine )
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier. For most year-round service,
No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 will provide good performance. If
the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20 degrees F or -7 degrees C), or is re-
quired to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods, use clima-
tized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This
will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters. This
vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D-6751.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
7
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fuel Selection
( 6.7L Diesel Engine )
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law re-
quires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15
ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500
ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system. For most
year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will
provide good performance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or
-7°C), or is required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods,
use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel
fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel
filters. This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel
meeting ASTM specification D-975.
490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transmission Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Fluid G-56 Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Clutch Linkage Multipurpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P. or equivalent.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid 2500/3500
Models
GL-5 SAE 75W-90 Synthetic or equivalent. 2500/3500 axles do not require
limited slip additive.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopar威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance ........494
䡵 Maintenance Schedules — 5.9L Turbo Diesel ....494
▫ Schedule “B” ........................497
▫ Schedule “A” ........................506
䡵 Maintenance Schedules — 6.7L Turbo Diesel ....511
▫ Oil Change Indicator System .............512
▫ Perform Service Indicator ...............513
▫ Maintenance Schedule ..................514
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type in this section (Section 8) must be done at the times
or mileages specified to assure the continued proper
functioning of the emission control system. These, and all
other maintenance services included in this manual,
should be done to provide best vehicle performance and
reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for
vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty
areas and very short trip driving.
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES — 5.9L TURBO
DIESEL
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under one or more of the following conditions that are
listed below and at the beginning of the schedule.
•
Frequent short trips where the engine does not achieve
full operating temperature (operating temperature de-
fined as 190° F (66° C ) coolant temperature).
•
Extensive engine idling (over 10 minutes per hour of
operation) at ambient temperatures less than 32° F (0°
C).
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Frequent trailer towing.
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
Extensive operation at high engine speeds (greater
than 2900 rpm) and loads (greater than 70% throttle).
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
coolant every 100,000 miles (160 000 km) or 60 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-
ule ⬙B⬙.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about 15 minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir,
take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel
and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade
performance.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the batteries and clean and tighten the termi-
nals as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and transfer case (if
equipped), add as needed.
•
Check Filter Minder™. Replace air cleaner filter
element if necessary.
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
•
Drain water from the fuel filter.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the exhaust system.
•
Inspect the brake hoses.
•
Inspect the U-Joints ( if equipped) and front suspen-
sion components.
•
Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
•
Check the manual transmission fluid level.
•
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
•
Lubricate outer tie rod ends.
•
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting
496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Schedule “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
•
Frequent short trips where the engine does not achieve
full operating temperature (operating temperature de-
fined as 190° F (66° C ) coolant temperature).
•
Extensive engine idling (over 10 minutes per hour of
operation) at ambient temperatures less than 32° F (0°
C).
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Frequent trailer towing.
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
Extensive operation at high engine speeds (greater
than 2900 rpm) and loads (greater than 70% throttle).
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
coolant every 100,000 miles (160 000 km) or 60 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
SCHEDULE “B” 497
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500
(Kilometers) (12 000) (24 000) (36 000) (48 000) (60 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500,
4X4).
XXXXX
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XXXXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4)
models.
XXXXX
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Change front axle fluid (4x4) X X
Change rear axle fluid. X X
Replace fuel filter element. X X
Inspect drive belts, replace as necessary. X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X
498 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500
(Kilometers) (12 000) (24 000) (36 000) (48 000) (60 000)
Inspect front wheel bearings. X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid. Re-
place filter and adjust bands (48RE only)
X
SCHEDULE “B” 499
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 45,000 52,500 60,000 67,500 75,000
(Kilometers) (72 000) (84 000) (96 000) (108 000) (120 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500,
4X4).
XXXXX
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XXXXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4)
models.
XXXXX
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4) X
Change front axle fluid (4x4) X X X
Change rear axle fluid. X X X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if
not replaced at 100,000 miles (160 000 km).
X
Inspect drive belts, replace as necessary. X X
Inspect brake linings. X X X
500 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 45,000 52,500 60,000 67,500 75,000
(Kilometers) (72 000) (84 000) (96 000) (108 000) (120 000)
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X X
Inspect front wheel bearings. X
Replace fuel filter element. X X X
Change 6 — speed manual transmission (G-56)
fluid.
X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid. Re-
place filter and adjust bands (48RE only)
X
SCHEDULE “B” 501
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 82,500 90,000 97,500 100,000 105,000
(Kilometers) (132 000) (144 000) (156 000) (160 000) (168 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500,
4X4).
XXX X
Rotate tires. X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XXX X
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4)
models.
XXX X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced
at 60 mos.
X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Change front axle fluid (4x4). X X
Change rear axle fluid. X X
Inspect drive belt, replace as required. X
Replace fuel filter element. X X
502 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 82,500 90,000 97,500 100,000 105,000
(Kilometers) (132 000) (144 000) (156 000) (160 000) (168 000)
Inspect front wheel bearings. X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid. Re-
place filter and adjust bands (48 RE only).
X
SCHEDULE “B” 503
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 112,500 120,000 127,500 135,000 142,500 150,000
(Kilometers) (181 000) (193 000) (205 000) (217 000) (229 000) (241 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/
3500, 4X4).
X X XXXX
Rotate tires. X X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor-
rect stowage.
X X XXXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4)
models.
X X XXXX
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120
months, if not replaced at 100,000 miles (160
000 km).
X
Clean engine air filter assembly. X
Inspect drive belt, replace as required. X X
Change front axle fluid (4x4). X X X
Change rear axle fluid. X X X
504 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 112,500 120,000 127,500 135,000 142,500 150,000
(Kilometers) (181 000) (193 000) (205 000) (217 000) (229 000) (241 000)
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Replace fuel filter element. X X X
Inspect front wheel bearings. X X
Inspect brake linings. X X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X X
Adjust valve lash clearance. X
Change 6 — speed manual transmission (G-
56) fluid.
X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid.
Replace filter and adjust bands (48RE only)
X
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
SCHEDULE “B” 505
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Schedule “A”
Miles 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500
(Kilometers) (12 000) (24 000) (36 000) (48 000) (60 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4). X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
X X XXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models. X X X X X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Replace fuel filter element. X X
Inspect drive belts, replace as necessary. X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X
Inspect front wheel bearings. X
506 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 45,000 52,500 60,000 67,500 75,000
(Kilometers) (72 000) (84 000) (96 000) (108 000) (120 000)
[Months] [36] [42] [48] [54] [60]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4). X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
X X XXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models. X X X X X
Check transfer case fluid level. X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if not
replaced at 100,000 miles (160 000 km).
X
Inspect drive belts, replace as necessary. X X
Replace fuel filter element. X X X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X
Inspect front wheel bearings. X
SCHEDULE “A” 507
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 82,500 90,000 97,500 100,000 105,000
(Kilometers) (132 000) (144 000) (156 000) (160 000) (168 000)
[Months] [66] [72] [78] [84]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4). X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. X X X X
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models. X X X X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60 mos. X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Inspect drive belt, replace as required. X
Replace fuel filter element. X X
Inspect front wheel bearings. X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid. Replace filter
and adjust bands (48 RE only).
X
508 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 112,500 120,000 127,500 135,000 142,500 150,000
(Kilometers) (181 000) (193 000) (205 000) (217 000) (229 000) (241 000)
[Months] [90] [96] [102] [108] [114] [120]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/
3500, 4X4).
X X XXXX
Rotate tires. X X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor-
rect stowage.
X X XXXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4)
models.
X X XXXX
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120
months, if not replaced at 100,000 miles
(160 000 km).
X
Inspect drive belt, replace as required. X X
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Replace fuel filter element. X X X
SCHEDULE “A” 509
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 112,500 120,000 127,500 135,000 142,500 150,000
(Kilometers) (181 000) (193 000) (205 000) (217 000) (229 000) (241 000)
[Months] [90] [96] [102] [108] [114] [120]
Inspect front wheel bearings. X X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X
Adjust valve lash clearance. X
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
510 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES — 6.7L TURBO
DIESEL
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about 30 minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir,
take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel
and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade
performance.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the batteries and clean and tighten the termi-
nals as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and transfer case (if
equipped), add as needed.
•
Check Filter Minder™. Replace air cleaner filter
element if necessary.
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
•
Drain water from the fuel filter.
SCHEDULE “A” 511
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the exhaust system.
•
Inspect the brake hoses.
•
Inspect the U-Joints ( if equipped) and front suspen-
sion components.
•
Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
•
Check the manual transmission fluid level.
•
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
•
Lubricate outer tie rod ends (4X4) models only.
•
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting ( 4X4).
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
Oil Change Indicator System
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. This system will alert you when it is
time to change your engine oil by displaying the words
“Oil Change Required” on your Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC). The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate depending on your per-
sonal driving style. Driving styles such as frequent stop
and go type driving can increase the frequency of the
engine oil change. This is the result of more frequent
regeneration of the exhaust aftertreatment system, which
can decrease the life of the engine oil. Failure to change
the engine oil per the maintenance schedule can result in
internal engine damage.
512 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
For information on resetting the Oil Change Indicator
message, refer to “Oil Change Required – If Equipped,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Fea-
tures),” in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” Section of this manual.
Perform Service Indicator
Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a set
interval. To help remind you when this maintenance is
due, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
will display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform Ser-
vice” message is displayed on the EVIC it is necessary to
have the emissions maintenance performed. Emissions
maintenance includes replacing the Closed Crankcase
Ventilation (CCV) filter element, cleaning or replacement
of the EGR Cooler, and cleaning or replacement of the
EGR Valve. The procedure for clearing and resetting the
⬙Perform Service⬙ indicator message is located in the
appropriate Service Information.
SCHEDULE “A” 513
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Maintenance Schedule
Miles 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500
(Kilometers) (12 000) (24 000) (36 000) (48 000) (60 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. (Under no
circumstances should oil change intervals exceed
7,500 miles (12 000 km) or 6 months, which ever
comes first).
X X XXX
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (4X4). X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
X X XXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends. X X X X X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). X X
Replace fuel filter element. X X
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X
514 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500
(Kilometers) (12 000) (24 000) (36 000) (48 000) (60 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30]
Inspect fan hub. X
Inspect damper. X
Inspect front wheel bearings. X
Inspect drive belt, replace as necessary. X
SCHEDULE “A” 515
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 45,000 52,500 60,000 67,500 75,000
(Kilometers) (72 000) (84 000) (97 000) (109 000) (121 000)
[Months] [36] [42] [48] [54] [60]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (4X4). X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
X X XXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends. X X X X X
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). X
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). X X X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid,
change main sump filter and spin-on cooler filter
(if equipped). If your vehicle is used for police,
taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
X
Change manual transmission fluid. X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if
not replaced at 100,000 miles (160 000 km).
X
516 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 45,000 52,500 60,000 67,500 75,000
(Kilometers) (72 000) (84 000) (97 000) (109 000) (121 000)
[Months] [36] [42] [48] [54] [60]
Inspect drive belt, replace as necessary. X X
Replace fuel filter element. X X X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X
Inspect fan hub. X
Inspect damper. X
Inspect front wheel bearings. X
Replace Crankcase Ventilation Filter (CCV). X
Clean or replace (if necessary), EGR Valve. X
Clean or replace (if necessary), EGR Cooler. X
SCHEDULE “A” 517
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 82,500 90,000 97,500 100,000 105,000
(Kilometers) (133 000) (145 000) (157 000) (160 000) (169 000)
[Months] [66] [72] [78] [84]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (4X4). X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XXX X
Lubricate outer tie rod ends. X X X X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at
60 mos.
X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). X X
Inspect drive belt, replace as required.* X X
Inspect fan hub. X
Inspect damper. X
Replace fuel filter element. X X
518 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 82,500 90,000 97,500 100,000 105,000
(Kilometers) (133 000) (145 000) (157 000) (160 000) (169 000)
[Months] [66] [72] [78] [84]
Inspect front wheel bearings. X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X
SCHEDULE “A” 519
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 112,500 120,000 127,500 135,000 142,500 150,000
(Kilometers) (181 000) (193 000) (205 000) (217 000) (229 000) (241 000)
[Months] [90] [96] [102] [108] [114] [120]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (4X4). X X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor-
rect stowage.
X X XXXX
Lubricate outer tie rod ends. X X X X X X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120
months, if not replaced at 100,000 miles
(161 000 km).
X
Inspect drive belt, replace as required.* X X X
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4). X X X
520 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 112,500 120,000 127,500 135,000 142,500 150,000
(Kilometers) (181 000) (193 000) (205 000) (217 000) (229 000) (241 000)
[Months] [90] [96] [102] [108] [114] [120]
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid
and change main sump filter and spin-on
cooler filter (if equipped).
XX
Change manual transmission fluid. X
Inspect fan hub. X X
Inspect damper. X X
Replace fuel filter element. X X X
Inspect front wheel bearings. X X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X
Adjust valve lash clearance. X
Replace Crankcase Ventilation Filter (CCV). X
Clean or replace (if necessary), EGR Valve. X
Clean or replace (if necessary), EGR Cooler. X
SCHEDULE “A” 521
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
*This maintenance is not required if belt was previously
replaced.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
522 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For
YourVehicle ..........................524
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............524
▫ Prepare A List ........................524
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............524
䡵 If You Need Assistance ...................524
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .....527
䡵 Mopar威 Parts .........................527
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ..................527
▫ In Canada ..........................528
䡵 Publication Order Forms ..................528
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................530
▫ Treadwear ..........................530
▫ Traction Grades ......................530
▫ Temperature Grades ...................531
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
524 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
•
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Dealership name
•
Vehicle identification number
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 525
9
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
526 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 527
9
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
http://www.NHTSA.gov.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
528 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call Toll Free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
•
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 529
9
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
530 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 531
9
INDEX
10
Adding Fuel ...........................352
Adjustable Pedals ....................... 138
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............422,424,460
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............438
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............438,439
Air Conditioning System ................ 259,438
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control ........262
AirFilter ...........................422,424
Air Pressure, Tires .................... 335,343
Airbag ..............................46,52
Airbag Light .........................77,199
Airbag On/Off Switch .....................52
Airbag, Side ............................55
Alarm, Out of Park Sense ...............296,302
Alarm, Panic ............................ 23
Alarm (Security Alarm) .................18,201
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ............... 18
Alignment and Balance ................... 342
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 8
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................252
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..............446,447
Capacities ........................... 487
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...............204,324
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........ 18
Anti-Theft System ..................... 18,201
Appearance Care ........................ 463
Ashtray ............................... 171
AutomaticDimmingMirror ................. 85
Automatic Door Locks .................... 153
Automatic Transaxle ...................... 12
Interlock System ........................ 15
Automatic Transmission ................... 455
Adding Fluid .........................456
Fluid and Filter Changes ................. 457
Fluid Level Check ...................... 455
FluidType ........................457,491
Shift Indicator ........................201
534 INDEX
Shifting ..........................291,297
Special Additives ......................458
Autostick .............................201
AxleFluid .......................... 454,491
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ............... 454
BallJoints ............................. 440
Battery ...............................437
Blanket .......................... 285,438
Emergency Starting .....................399
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......24
Saving Feature (Protection) ............... 130
Bearings ..............................458
Belts,Drive ............................422
Belts, Seat .............................. 34
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............441
B-Pillar Location ........................ 330
Brake Fluid ............................491
Brake System ........................321,451
Anti-Lock (ABS) .......................322
Disc Brakes .......................... 451
Fluid Check .......................... 452
Hoses .............................. 453
Master Cylinder .......................452
Parking ............................. 320
Warning Light ........................203
Bulb Replacement ....................... 474
Bulbs,Light ............................473
Cab Top Clearance Lights .................. 482
Calibration, Compass ..................147,158
Camper ............................... 188
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........ 487
Capacities, Fluid ........................ 487
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ..........................418
Power Steering ........................ 439
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............447
INDEX 535
10
Car Washes ............................ 463
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............76,190
CargoLight ............................ 132
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance .........255
Catalyst Full Message ..................... 434
CD (Compact Disc) Player ............ 209,217,231
Cellular Phone ..........................89
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............481
Center Lap Belts ......................... 43
Center Seat Storage Compartment .........176,177
Certification Label ....................... 355
Charge Air Cooler ....................... 450
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 327
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ............... 202
Child Restraint ........................ 60,61
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............65,69
Child Seat ............................ 61,68
Cigar Lighter ........................... 171
Cleaning
Wheels ............................. 465
Climate Control .........................257
Clock ..................... 207,211,219,232,245
Clutch Linkage Maintenance ................453
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............256
Compact Spare Tire ......................338
Compass ...........................146,147
Compass Calibration .................. 147,158
Compass Variance .................... 148,158
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 143
Console, Overhead ....................142,150
Contract, Service ........................526
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .......... 447
Cooling System ......................... 444
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............447
Coolant Capacity ...................... 487
Coolant Level ................... 444,445,448
Disposal of Used Coolant ................ 448
536 INDEX
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................446
Inspection ...........................448
Points to Remember .................... 449
Pressure Cap .........................447
Radiator Cap .........................447
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......... 446,488
Temperature Gauge ..................... 200
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............139
CupHolder ............................ 172
Customer Assistance .....................524
Customer Programmable Features ............153
Data Recorder, Event ...................... 58
Daytime Running Lights ...................131
Dealer Service .......................... 411
Defroster, Rear Window .................88,181
Defroster, Windshield ................77,258,261
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 135
Diesel Exhaust Brake .....................290
Diesel Fuel ............................ 348
Diesel Fuel Requirements ..................348
Differential, Limited-Slip .................. 317
Dipsticks ..............................414
Power Steering ........................ 439
Disc Brakes ............................451
Disposal .............................. 421
Engine Oil ...........................421
Used Coolant (Antifreeze) ................448
Door Locks ............................. 25
Door Locks, Automatic ....................153
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 160
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ....... 427,430
DriveBelts ............................422
Dual Rear Wheels ..................... 347,396
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ......249
Electric Rear Window Defrost .............88,181
Electrical Power Outlets ................... 169
INDEX 537
10
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ...............295
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 139
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....151
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case ...........310
Emergency Brake ........................ 320
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ............... 402
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 386
Jacking ............................. 389
Jump Starting .........................399
Tow Hooks ..........................403
Towing .............................404
Emission Control System Maintenance ......... 494
Engine ............................ 408,409
Air Cleaner ........................ 422,424
Block Heater .......................276,283
Break-In Recommendations ................ 74
Compartment ...................... 408,409
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................488
Cooling .............................444
DataPlate ...........................411
Identification ......................408,409
Idling .............................. 286
Jump Starting .........................399
Oil .............................. 414,488
Oil Filler Cap ......................... 418
Oil Synthetic ....................... 285,419
Runaway ............................ 348
Temperature Gauge ..................... 200
Event Data Recorder ......................58
Exhaust Brake ..........................290
Exhaust Gas Caution ................ 76,190,444
Exhaust System ................. 76,443,444,459
ExteriorLighting ........................ 130
Fabric Care ............................465
Fan ..................................450
538 INDEX
Filters
Engine Oil ..................... 414,419,488
Flashers
Turn Signal ..........................133
Flat Tire Stowage .....................388,398
Fluid, Brake ...........................491
Fluid Capacities ......................... 487
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ...............................452
Manual Transmission ...................455
Power Steering ........................ 439
Transfer Case .........................455
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........488
Fog Lights .......................132,202,477
Fold Flat Load Floor ..................... 183
Four Wheel Drive ....................... 306
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .................. 386
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................402
Front Axle (Differential) ................ 441,454
Fuel .............................. 348,352
Adding .............................352
Diesel ...................... 348,350,352,488
Gauge ..............................206
Light ............................... 206
Requirements ......................348,350
Specifications ...................... 349,351
Tank Capacity ........................ 487
Fuses ................................468
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........160
Gauges ...............................198
Coolant Temperature .................... 200
Fuel ................................ 206
Oil Pressure ..........................200
Speedometer .........................199
Tachometer .......................... 199
Voltmeter .........................198,282
Gear Ranges ...................... 291,297,304
INDEX 539
10
General Information ....................18,114
Glass Cleaning .......................... 466
Grocery Bag Retainer .....................181
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................. 359
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................358
GVWR ...............................355
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) ..............89
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 386
Head Restraints .........................117
Headlights ............................ 474
High Beam ...........................134
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........134
Lights On Reminder ....................132
Passing .............................134
Switch ..............................130
Heated Mirrors ....................... 88,181
Heated Seats ...........................125
Heater ...............................259
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 134
Hitches
TrailerTowing ........................ 362
Hoisting .............................. 398
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 160
Hood Release ..........................127
Hoses .............................451,453
Hub Caps ............................. 394
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid ....................453
Ignition ...............................12
Key ................................. 12
Ignition Key Removal .....................12
Illuminated Entry ........................ 19
Infant Restraint ........................60,61
Inflation Pressure Tires .................... 343
Information Center ...................... 151
Information Center, Vehicle .................151
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................84
540 INDEX
Instrument Cluster .................... 196,198
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............195
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............. 467
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............ 468
Interior Appearance Care ..................466
Interior Lights ..........................129
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........135
Intervention Regeneration Strategy ...........434
Introduction .............................4
Jack Location ........................... 387
Jack Operation ..........................389
Jump Starting ..........................399
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15
Keyless Entry System ......................20
Keys .................................12
Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............133
LapBelts .............................. 43
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................34
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . 65
LifeofTires ............................340
Lights ..............................78,128
Airbag ............................57,199
Anti-Lock Warning .................. 204,324
Brake Warning ........................ 203
Bulb Replacement ................... 473,474
Cap Top Clearance .....................482
Cargo ..............................132
Center Mounted Stop ................... 481
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) ........ 202
Courtesy/Reading .....................142
Cruise .............................. 206
Daytime Running ......................131
Dome ..............................150
Dual Wheel Assembly Rear ...............484
INDEX 541
10
Fog .......................... 132,202,477
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator ...............309
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 386
Headlights ...........................130
High Beam ........................134,199
High Beam Indicator .................... 199
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............134
Illuminated Entry .......................19
Instrument Cluster ..................... 198
Intensity Control .......................129
Interior .......................... 129,142
Lights On Reminder ....................132
Passing .............................134
Reading .............................150
Seat Belt Reminder .....................199
Service ........................... 473,474
Side Marker .......................... 486
Transfer Case .........................309
Transmission Warning ................... 205
Turn Signal ..................133,199,474,478
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....198
Limited-Slip Differential ................ 317,454
Loading Vehicle .........................355
Tires ............................... 330
Locks ................................. 25
Child Protection ........................29
Door ................................25
Keys ................................12
Power Door ...........................26
Steering Wheel ......................... 15
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . 65
Lubrication, Body ....................... 441
LugNuts .............................394
Lumbar Support ........................ 118
Maintenance ...........................411
Maintenance Procedures ................... 414
Maintenance Schedule ..................494,511
542 INDEX
Schedule “A” .........................506
Manual, Service .........................528
Manual Transmission .................. 303,455
Fluid Level Check ...................... 455
Lubricant Selection .....................491
Shift Speeds .......................... 304
Map/Reading Lights ..................... 150
Mirrors ................................84
Automatic Dimming ..................... 85
Electric Powered .......................87
Outside ..............................86
Rearview ............................. 84
TrailerTowing ......................88,371
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 8
Mopar Parts ......................... 410,527
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............133
Navigation Radio ........................245
Navigation System ....................... 245
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 74
Noise Control
Maintenance .......................... 459
Tampering Prohibited ...................460
Noise Emission Warranty ...............458,461
Occupant Restraints ....................... 33
Occupant Restraints (2500/3500/Mega Cab Only) . . 33
Odometer ..........................201,206
Trip ............................. 201,206
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ............319
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ............319
Oil Change Indicator ................ 153,156,512
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .................153
Oil, Engine ............................488
Capacity ............................487
Change Interval ....................415,416
Dipstick ............................. 414
Disposal ............................ 421
INDEX 543
10
Filter ......................... 414,419,488
Identification Logo ..................... 418
Materials Added to .....................419
Pressure Gauge .......................200
Recommendation ................... 416,418
Synthetic ............................ 419
Viscosity ..........................417,418
Oil Filter, Change ........................ 419
Onboard Diagnostic System ................410
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ...........160
Operating Precautions ....................410
Out of Park Sense Alarm ................296,302
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................. 86
Overdrive ..........................293,300
Overdrive OFF Switch ................. 293,300
Overhead Console ................. 142,143,150
Overhead Travel Information Center ..........143
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .......... 528
Panic Alarm ............................23
Parking Brake ..........................320
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch ............. 52
Passing Light ........................... 134
Pedals, Adjustable .......................138
Perform Service Indicator, Reset .............513
Personal Settings ........................153
Phone, Cellular ..........................89
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) .............89
Pickup Box ............................ 186
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 330
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ............... 468
Door Locks ........................... 26
Mirrors ..............................87
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........169
Seats ...............................118
Sliding Rear Window .................32,182
Steering .......................... 324,439
544 INDEX
Sunroof .............................166
Windows ............................. 30
Power Steering Fluid .....................491
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts .............. 45
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................. 44
Programmable Electronic Features ......153,162,165
Radial Ply Tires .........................337
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......... 447
Radio Broadcast Signals ...................207
Radio, Navigation ....................... 245
Radio Operation ................... 209,217,231
Radio Remote Controls .................... 253
Radio, Satellite ....................... 245,249
Radio (Sound Systems) ..............209,217,231
Rear Axle (Differential) ....................454
Rear Seat, Folding ....................120,122
Rear Wheel Bearings .....................458
Rear Window Features ....................181
Rear Window, Sliding ...................32,182
Reclining Front Seats .....................116
Reclining Rear Seats ...................... 120
Recorder, Event Data ...................... 58
Recreational Towing ...................... 377
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ....378,380
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . 379,382
Refrigerant ............................ 439
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................... 44
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................. 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........ 253
Replacement Tires ....................... 341
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 527
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...........153,156
Resetting Perform Service Indicator ...........513
Restraint, Head .........................117
Restraints, Child ....................... 60,68
Rotation, Tires ..........................345
INDEX 545
10
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ................. 77
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............77
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................527
Safety Information, Tire ................... 325
Safety Tips ............................. 75
Satellite Radio .......................245,249
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................252
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 467
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 44
Seat Belts .......................... 33,34,77
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........ 42
And Pregnant Women ................... 45
Child Restraint ....................... 60,74
Extender .............................46
Front Seat ............................ 34
Pretensioners .......................... 44
Reminder ............................199
Seats .................................115
Adjustment .......................... 115
Child ............................... 74
Cleaning ............................465
FoldingFloor ......................... 183
Heated ............................. 125
Lumbar Support ....................... 118
Power .............................. 118
Rear Folding ....................... 120,122
Reclining ............................116
Reclining Rear ........................ 120
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............. 18,201
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........446,488
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................15
Service Assistance .......................524
Service Contract .........................526
Service Information ......................411
Service Manuals ........................ 528
Setting the Clock ............. 207,211,219,232,245
Settings, Personal ........................153
Shifting ...............................291
546 INDEX
Automatic Transmission ............... 291,297
Manual Transmission ...................303
Transfer Case .........................308
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ......................... 378,380
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ......................... 379,382
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage .............. 42
Shoulder Belts ...........................34
Side Airbag ............................. 55
Signals, Turn ...........................133
Sliding Rear Window
Power ............................ 32,182
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ............... 318
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................. 343
Snow Plow ............................373
Snow Tires ............................345
Soot Filter ............................. 434
Spare Tire .............................338
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............139
Speedometer ...........................199
Starting ............................... 275
Automatic Transmission ................. 276
Engine Block Heater ................. 276,283
Manual Transmission ...................275
Starting Procedures ......................275
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) .......... 275
Steering
Linkage .............................440
Power ........................... 324,439
Wheel Lock ........................... 15
Wheel, Tilt ...........................137
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . 253
Storage, Behind the Seat ................... 176
Storage Compartment, Center Seat ......... 176,177
Storage, Vehicle .........................472
StoringYourVehicle ...................... 472
Sun Roof .............................. 166
INDEX 547
10
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information ........343
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................285,419
System, Navigation ...................... 245
Tachometer ............................ 199
Tailgate ............................... 188
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint .............65,69
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 137
Tire and Loading Information Placard ...... 330,343
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............329
Tire Markings ..........................325
Tire Safety Information .................... 325
Tires ............................77,334,530
Aging(LifeofTires) ....................340
Air Pressure .......................... 334
Alignment ...........................342
Chains .............................. 343
Changing ............................388
Compact Spare ........................338
Dual ............................347,396
General Information ....................334
High Speed ..........................336
Inflation Pressures ..................... 335
Jacking ............................. 389
LifeofTires .......................... 340
Load Capacity ..................... 330,331
Quality Grading .......................530
Radial ..............................337
Replacement ......................... 341
Rotation .............................345
Safety ........................... 325,334
Sizes ...............................327
Snow Tires ...........................345
Spare Tire ...........................388
Spinning ............................ 339
Tread Wear Indicators ...................340
Wheel Mounting .......................389
Wheel Nut Torque ..................... 394
548 INDEX
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .............. 363
Torque Converter Clutch ................296,302
Tow Hooks, Emergency ................... 403
Tow/Haul ............................. 294
Towing ...............................358
Disabled Vehicle .......................404
Guide .............................. 363
Recreational .......................... 377
Weight .............................. 363
Traction .............................. 318
Traction Control ......................... 455
TrailerTowing .......................... 358
Cooling System Tips ....................371
Hitches ............................. 362
Minimum Requirements ................. 364
Mirrors ........................... 88,371
Trailer and Tongue Weight ................363
Wiring .............................. 368
TrailerTowingGuide .....................363
TrailerWeight .......................... 363
Transaxle
Automatic ............................ 12
Manual .............................. 14
Transfer Case
Electronically Shifted .................... 310
Fluid ...............................491
Transmission
Automatic ......................291,297,455
Fluid ...............................491
Maintenance .......................... 455
Manual ........................ 275,303,455
Shifting ............................. 291
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . 24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 160
Tread Wear Indicators .................... 340
Trip Computer ..........................143
Trip Odometer .......................201,206
Turn Signals ...................133,199,474,478
INDEX 549
10
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ..............89
Underhood Fuses ........................468
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 530
Universal Transmitter .....................160
Variance, Compass ....................148,158
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............8
Vehicle Information Center .................151
Vehicle Loading ...................... 331,355
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............8
Vehicle Storage .........................472
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) ..................249
Viscosity, Engine Oil ......................418
Voltmeter ........................... 198,282
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............198
Warnings and Cautions ..................... 7
Warranty Information .....................527
Washers, Windshield ..................136,442
Washing Vehicle ......................... 463
Wheel Alignment and Balance ............... 342
Wheel and Wheel Trim .................... 465
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................ 465
Wheel Changing ........................ 388
Wheel Cover ...........................394
Wheel Mounting ........................ 389
Wheel Nut Torque ....................394,397
WindBuffeting ....................... 32,169
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) ...............55
Window Fogging ........................ 267
Windows ..............................30
Power ...............................30
Rear Sliding ........................ 32,182
Windshield Defroster .................. 258,261
Windshield Washers ................ 135,136,442
Fluid ............................ 135,442
550 INDEX
NOTES
